Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 504

Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

IDTECK STANDARD

SOFTWARE USER MANUAL

1
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

ManualRevisionInformation

RevisionNumber Date Description


Rev-20090205-10000 February 05, 2009 Initial Manual

Manual of Starwtach STANDARD V1.00.00

Rev-20110314 March 14, 2011 Manual of Starwtach STANDARD V1.05.00


Rev-20120504 May 04, 2012 Manual of IDTECK STANDARD V2.00.07
Rev-20121116 November 16, 2012 Manual of IDTECK STANDARD

V2.01.00

Rev-20130205 February 05, 2013 Manual of IDTECK STANDARD V2.01.05


– Card Add On
Rev-20130531 May 31, 2013 Manual of IDTECK STANDARD V2.02.05
– Whether to reflect user management
per individual access door or not
Rev-20130618 June 18, 2013 State size of report view is A4
Change video menu’s DVR to Recorder
Rev-20130703 July 03, 2013 Reflect manual C.Q
Rev-20131001 October 01, 2013 Reflect manual C.Q
Rev-20140106 January 06. 2014 Mac Add on
Rev-20140107 January 07. 2014 Timepro Add on
Rev-20140527 May 27, 2014
Add setting function on door to be
monitored.
Reflect policy on new license
Change brand name from IDTECK to
IDTECK

Rev-20140612 June 12, 2014


Add Multi selection. batch transmit of
information by device

Rev-20140701 July 01, 2014


Add mealtime and breaktime setting

Rev-20140723 July 23. 2014


MileStone add on

Rev-20150320 March 20, 2015


Expired Access Card delete improvement

Add old Software Function

Rev-20151022 October 22, 2015


Added Card Holder Mangement Auto
Save Function

Rev-20160526 May 26, 2016


Search Card Holder - Additional search

2
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

criteria whether fingerprint data

Normal Event Report – Employee ID


additional search criteria

Rev-20161011 October 11, 2016


- License Code : In case of Access Only +
Milestone, Modified program error

- Time schedule code modified 10 to 15


(iTDC(SR) : 15)

- Except Korean,English version of


Window10 OS, modified the issu that
program doesn’t operate on OS

- Among MSSQL Server Express versions,


above 2008 R2 check 10G byte(below
version check to 4G byte)

- IDK FileServer File Added (Process


Image, Video Data of Mac Device)

3
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

Table of Contents
1. Introduction and Installation ...........................................................................................................................................................12

1.1 IDTECK STANDARD ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 12

1.1.1 IDTECK STANDARD MAIN FUNCTIONS ................................................................................................................................... 12

1.2 Installation ............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 17

1.2.1 Installation Flow Chart ...................................................................................................................................................................... 17

1.2.2 IDTECK STANDARD Program Installation ................................................................................................................................ 17

1.2.3 License Keylock Driver Installation.............................................................................................................................................. 41

2. Configuration..........................................................................................................................................................................................42

2.1 Initial Configuration .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 42

2.1.1 Connection Environment Setting (STANDARD Program) ................................................................................................ 42

2.1.2 Connection Environment Setting (Communication Server) ............................................................................................ 44

2.1.3 MileStone Server Configuration ................................................................................................................................................... 46

2.1.4 Log on....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 47

2.1.5 License Setting ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 48

2.1.6 Building-Floor Setting ....................................................................................................................................................................... 49

2.1.7 Site Setting ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 50

2.1.8 LoopSetting ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 52

2.1.9 Device Setting ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 55

2.1.10 DoorSetting.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 57

2.1.11 Reader Point Setting ....................................................................................................................................................................... 60

2.1.12 InputPoint Setting............................................................................................................................................................................. 61

2.1.13 OutputPoint Setting......................................................................................................................................................................... 63

2.1.14 Company Setting .............................................................................................................................................................................. 65

2.1.15 Access Group Setting...................................................................................................................................................................... 66

2.1.16 Cardholder Management .............................................................................................................................................................. 67

3. Program layout ................................................................................................................................................................................. 70

3.1 Common Screen and Buttons...................................................................................................................................................................... 70

3.1.1 Icon Description ................................................................................................................................................................................... 70

3.1.2 Screen Layout ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 71

4
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

4. System settings ......................................................................................................................................................................................74

4.1 Setting Wizard ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 74

4.1.1 Device Setting Wizard....................................................................................................................................................................... 74

4.2 Building Setting................................................................................................................................................................................................... 78

4.2.1 Building-Floor Setting ....................................................................................................................................................................... 78

4.3 Communication Environment Setting ...................................................................................................................................................... 80

4.3.1 Site Setting ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 80

4.3.2 LoopSetting ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 82

4.4 Device and DoorSetting.................................................................................................................................................................................. 86

4.4.1 Device Setting ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 86

4.4.2 Door Setting........................................................................................................................................................................................... 95

4.5 Reader/Input/OutputPoint Setting ............................................................................................................................................................ 99

4.5.1 Reader Point Setting.......................................................................................................................................................................... 99

4.5.2 Input PointSetting ............................................................................................................................................................................ 101

4.5.3 Output PointSetting ........................................................................................................................................................................ 105

5. System management ....................................................................................................................................................................... 108

5.1 Device Management...................................................................................................................................................................................... 108

5.1.1 Initialize Device .................................................................................................................................................................................. 108

5.1.2 Device Time Setting ........................................................................................................................................................................ 111

5.1.3 Batch Transmit by Device............................................................................................................................................................. 114

5.1.4 Card Holder Batch Transmission by Device ........................................................................................................................ 116

5.1.5 Information Receive from Device ............................................................................................................................................. 118

5.1.6 Firmware Upgrade............................................................................................................................................................................ 120

5.2 Master Card Setting....................................................................................................................................................................................... 121

5.2.1 Master Card Setting ........................................................................................................................................................................ 121

6. Operations management ............................................................................................................................................................... 125

6.1 Basic Setting ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 125

6.1.1 Company Setting .............................................................................................................................................................................. 125

6.1.2 Department Setting ......................................................................................................................................................................... 127

6.1.3 Title Setting ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 129

6.1.4 Position Registration ....................................................................................................................................................................... 131

6.1.5 Company-Department Setting................................................................................................................................................... 133

5
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

6.1.6 Company-Title Setting ................................................................................................................................................................... 134

6.1.7 Company-Position Setting ........................................................................................................................................................... 135

6.1.8 Access Type Setting ........................................................................................................................................................................ 136

6.2 Fire Information Grouping.......................................................................................................................................................................... 138

6.2.1 Fire Group Setting............................................................................................................................................................................ 138

6.3 Graphic Map Setting ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 140

6.3.1 Graphic map Setting ....................................................................................................................................................................... 140

6.4 Mustering Management .............................................................................................................................................................................. 143

6.4.1 Area Setting......................................................................................................................................................................................... 143

6.4.2 Confirm card has left the area................................................................................................................................................... 145

7. Access control management ........................................................................................................................................................ 147

7.1 Managing time schedule............................................................................................................................................................................. 147

7.1.1 Holiday Setting .................................................................................................................................................................................. 147

7.1.2 Time Slot Setting .............................................................................................................................................................................. 151

7.1.3 Timeschedule Setting ..................................................................................................................................................................... 153

7.1.4 Access Group Setting ..................................................................................................................................................................... 156

7.2 Card Holder Setting ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 160

7.2.1 Registering employee..................................................................................................................................................................... 160

8. basic setting & administration .................................................................................................................................................... 172

8.1 Basic settings..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 172

8.1.1 Reader Setting(Attendance) ........................................................................................................................................................ 172

8.1.2 Time and Attendance code setting ......................................................................................................................................... 173

8.1.3 Closing Hour ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 175

8.2 Attendance Basic Setting ............................................................................................................................................................................ 177

8.2.1 Overtime Setting............................................................................................................................................................................... 177

8.2.2 Mealtime Setting .............................................................................................................................................................................. 180

8.2.3 Breaktime Setting ............................................................................................................................................................................. 183

8.2.4 Function key Setting ....................................................................................................................................................................... 186

8.2.5 Work Time Code Setting .............................................................................................................................................................. 188

8.2.6 Work Schedule Setting .................................................................................................................................................................. 192

8.2.7 Closing Rule Setting........................................................................................................................................................................ 195

8.2.8 Holiday Setting (Attendance) ..................................................................................................................................................... 197

6
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

8.3 Administration .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 199

8.3.1 Register Retire .................................................................................................................................................................................... 199

8.3.2 Retirement Reservation Setting................................................................................................................................................. 201

8.3.3 Receive Exception............................................................................................................................................................................. 203

9. shift(attendance) ................................................................................................................................................................................ 205

9.1 Shift ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 205

9.1.1 Set Shift ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 205

9.1.2 Working time setting by Shift.................................................................................................................................................... 207

9.1.3 Shift Rotation Setting ..................................................................................................................................................................... 209

9.1.4 Set Shift Schedule ............................................................................................................................................................................ 211

9.1.5 Work on Holiday Setting by Shift ............................................................................................................................................ 218

10. closing(attendance) ........................................................................................................................................................................ 220

10.1 Closing process.............................................................................................................................................................................................. 220

10.1.1 Daily Closing..................................................................................................................................................................................... 220

10.1.2 Weekly Closing................................................................................................................................................................................ 222

10.1.3 Monthly Closing ............................................................................................................................................................................. 223

10.1.4 Revise Daily Closing...................................................................................................................................................................... 225

10.2 Report................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 227

10.2.1 Workcode/Exception Setting Report.................................................................................................................................... 227

10.2.2 Closing report .................................................................................................................................................................................. 243

10.2.3 Statistics Report .............................................................................................................................................................................. 247

10.2.4 Suspension/Retire Report .......................................................................................................................................................... 251

10.2.5 Mealtime Setting Report ............................................................................................................................................................ 253

10.2.6 Breaktime Setting Report........................................................................................................................................................... 255

11. Video..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 257

11.1 DVR Setting ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 257

11.1.1 Recorder Setting............................................................................................................................................................................. 257

11.1 Camera Setting ................................................................................................................................................................................... 259

11.2 MileStone Setting ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 261

11.2.1 MileStone Server Setting............................................................................................................................................................ 261

11.2.2 MileStone Camera Setting......................................................................................................................................................... 262

11.3 Camera ............................................................................................................................................................................................................... 265

7
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

11.3.1 Camera Mapping ........................................................................................................................................................................... 265

11.4 Search................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 268

11.4.1 Search Video Data ......................................................................................................................................................................... 268

11.5 Report................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 270

11.5.1 DVR and Camera Setting Report ........................................................................................................................................... 270

12. Lift .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 273

12.1 Lift Setting........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 273

12.1.1 Lift Setting ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 273

12.1.2 Lift Output Setting ........................................................................................................................................................................ 277

12.2 Lift Access Group Setting ......................................................................................................................................................................... 280

12.2.1 Lift Access Group Setting........................................................................................................................................................... 280

12.3 Report................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 283

12.3.1 Lift Access Group Report ........................................................................................................................................................... 283

12.3.2 Accessible Floor Report by Person ....................................................................................................................................... 285

12.3.3 Accessible Card Holder Report by Lift ................................................................................................................................ 288

13.CARD DESIGN .................................................................................................................................................................................... 291

13.1 Card Design Wizard .................................................................................................................................................................................... 291

13.1.1 New Card Design Wizard........................................................................................................................................................... 291

13.2 New Card Design Management............................................................................................................................................................ 300

13.2.1 New Card Design ........................................................................................................................................................................... 300

13.3 Card Design Print ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 334

13.3.1 Staff Card Print................................................................................................................................................................................ 334

13.3.2 Visitor Card Print ............................................................................................................................................................................ 339

13.4 Card Publish Count Set ............................................................................................................................................................................. 343

13.4.1 Card Publish Count Set............................................................................................................................................................... 343

13.5 Credit Card Report....................................................................................................................................................................................... 346

13.5.1 Some User Report ......................................................................................................................................................................... 346

13.5.2 Card Status Report ........................................................................................................................................................................ 349

14. Visitor management ...................................................................................................................................................................... 351

14.1 Visitor management.................................................................................................................................................................................... 351

14.1.1 Visitor information management ........................................................................................................................................... 351

14.1.2 Visitor access management ...................................................................................................................................................... 364

8
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

14.2 Web account management ..................................................................................................................................................................... 367

14.2.1 Visitors Web account management ..................................................................................................................................... 367

14.2.2 Receptionist web account management ............................................................................................................................ 369

14.3 Poor visitor management ......................................................................................................................................................................... 371

14.3.1 Card inconsistency management ........................................................................................................................................... 371

14.3.2 Poor visitors registration ............................................................................................................................................................ 373

14.4 Visitor types and special notice ............................................................................................................................................................ 376

14.4.1 Visitor types registration ............................................................................................................................................................ 376

14.4.2 Special notice registration ......................................................................................................................................................... 379

14.5 Database administration ........................................................................................................................................................................... 383

14.5.1 Import visitor information ......................................................................................................................................................... 383

14.6 Visitor information report ........................................................................................................................................................................ 388

14.6.1 Visitor information report .......................................................................................................................................................... 388

14.6.2 Reservation status report ........................................................................................................................................................... 390

14.6.2 Visit status report........................................................................................................................................................................... 393

14.6.4 Poor visitor status report ........................................................................................................................................................... 396

14.6.5 Statistics report ............................................................................................................................................................................... 398

14.7 Event status report....................................................................................................................................................................................... 401

14.7.1 Visitor normal event report ...................................................................................................................................................... 401

14.7.2 Visitor alarm event report ......................................................................................................................................................... 404

15. Monitoring ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 408

15.1 Output Monitoring ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 408

15.1.1 Output Monitoring........................................................................................................................................................................ 408

15.2 Intergrated Monitoring .............................................................................................................................................................................. 412

15.2.1 Intergrated Monitoring ............................................................................................................................................................... 412

16. Tool ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 415

16.1 User Account Setting.................................................................................................................................................................................. 415

16.1.1 User Account Registration......................................................................................................................................................... 415

16.1.2 Accounts Group Setting ............................................................................................................................................................. 417

16.1.3 Accounts Group Role Setting .................................................................................................................................................. 419

16.2 Multi-language Setting.............................................................................................................................................................................. 421

16.2.1 Language Convertor ..................................................................................................................................................................... 421

9
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

16.2.2 Language Setting ........................................................................................................................................................................... 424

16.3 Notification setting ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 425

16.3.1 E-mail/SMS Server setting ......................................................................................................................................................... 425

16.3.2 Recipient setting............................................................................................................................................................................. 427

16.4 Database Management ............................................................................................................................................................................. 429

16.4.1 Database Backup and Restore ................................................................................................................................................ 429

16.4.2 Data Import/Export ....................................................................................................................................................................... 434

16.5 Options .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 439

16.5.1 Options................................................................................................................................................................................................ 439

16.6 Icon ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 450

16.6.1 Icon Setting....................................................................................................................................................................................... 450

16.7 Delete Expired Card Id............................................................................................................................................................................... 452

16.7.1 Delete Expired Card Id ................................................................................................................................................................ 452

16.8 Delete Retiree Card Id................................................................................................................................................................................ 454

16.8.1 Delete Retiree Card Id ................................................................................................................................................................. 454

17. Report................................................................................................................................................................................................... 455

17.1 System Setting Report ............................................................................................................................................................................... 455

17.1.1 Device Setting Report.................................................................................................................................................................. 455

17.1.2 Holiday Setting Report................................................................................................................................................................ 458

17.1.3 Timeschedule Report ................................................................................................................................................................... 460

17.1.4 Access Group Setting Report................................................................................................................................................... 462

17.2 User Information Report ........................................................................................................................................................................... 464

17.2.1 Card Holder Report ...................................................................................................................................................................... 464

17.2.2 AllowedCardHolders by Door .................................................................................................................................................. 467

17.2.3 Accessible Door Report by Person........................................................................................................................................ 469

17.3 Event Report ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 471

17.3.1 Normal Event Report ................................................................................................................................................................... 471

17.3.2 Alarm Report .................................................................................................................................................................................... 474

17.4 Event Summary Report .............................................................................................................................................................................. 477

17.4.1 Access Event Summary Report by Reader ........................................................................................................................ 477

17.4.2 Access Event Summary Report by Card Holder ............................................................................................................. 481

17.5 Mustering Report ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 485

10
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

17.5.1 Mustering Report ........................................................................................................................................................................... 485

17.6 Etc Report......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 487

17.6.1 Auditing Log Report..................................................................................................................................................................... 487

17.6.2 Notification Report........................................................................................................................................................................ 490

17.6.3 User Defined Report..................................................................................................................................................................... 492

17.6.4 Login/outreport .............................................................................................................................................................................. 503

11
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

1. INTRODUCTION AND INSTALLATION


This chapter explains the main functions and installation environments of IDTECK STANDARD. Several steps to be
taken before the using e.g. Database installation, and IDTECK STANDARD installation.

1.1 IDTECK STANDARD

1.1.1 IDTECK STANDARD MAIN FUNCTIONS

This chapter explains main functions and installation environment of the program.

 Main Function

IDTECK STANDARD connects the controller and PC via Serial and TCP/IP communication to send and receive
data. It performs several tasks based on data received.The device and program are mutually connected to
provide higher security level through access control. It can also perform variety of additional functions.

1) Multi Site Support

 Multi Site Support can be operated by connecting to several sites at once or to a specific site
afterinstalling IDTECK Communication Server on each site. Also when several controllers are installed on
a single site disperse/discrete serversin order to increase the performance and lower the load. In this
case user can send and receive data concurrently using multi site support while connected to several
sites.

2) Multi Language Support

 Multi Language Supportprovides mutliligual service based on Unicode. Two main languages set as
default (Korean, English) in addition, 10 other languages are supported. Using a separate multi language
definition program, the user can convert English charaters into their own language.

3) Card Holder Management and Multi ID Managemnet Support

 Card Holder Management function saves numerous user information, additionally images of person and
car can be saved. Multi ID Management makes it able to issue multiple ID according to uses.

4) Map Function

 Map (floor plan) can be arrangedusing entire building and floor as basis of corresponding floor. User
can locate door, reader and input/output and depending on user options, graphic map will be shown
automatically on the map at the occurance of an event. Also various figures and images illustrated on
mapprovide finer visuality.

12
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

5) Alarm Event Acknowledgement

 Alarm Event Acknowledgement should used when an event occurs, the manager can input detail of
information to acknowledge the alarm. All alarm events must be acknowledged by the manager to have
the alarm event cancelled. The acknowledged result is stored in database for later retrieval as a report.

6) Alarm Event Type Color Indication

 Color differentiated alarm event type gives easy monitoring view in one screen.

7) Selection of Access Control Report

 Selections of Access Control Report can be issued by User Information Report, User/Visitor Alarm Status
Report, Visitor Access Status Report, User by Door Report, Accessible User Report, User/Visitor Event
Status Report and Etc.

8) Selection of Export and Convert Function

 All query/output of controller is supported with Export and Convert function. Export function is carried
by Text or Excel file type. This is serviceable when synchronize the IDTECK STANDARD with other
programs and transimitting data.Convert function converts all reports into TEXT, PDF, RTF, XLS, HTML,
and TIF. This is serviceable when sending reports via e-mail.

9) Selection of Options

 Varieties of Option areavailable to fulfil various circumstances and preferences. User can select different
monitoring types by events, various color indication is provided, option for saving database, customized
alarm Sounds and changing or adding font types and icons.

10) Setting Wizard Function

 Setting Wizard Function supports the convienience of beginner user. Retreiving the initial setting for
each phase is supported bySetting Wizard. Easy and convenient setting of Initial setting by
usingController Auto-Browsing function.

11) Ample Balloon Tool Tip

 All screen is provided with Balloon Tool Tip for each insert/select items and provides user of details.

12) Integrated Monitoring capable of customization

 User can separate or integrate monitoring types upto one’s preference. Also screen layout is customized
for user preference. Alarm and warning information can be customized. In case of using multi-monitors,
screen layout can be arranged.

13
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

13) Robust User History Management

 User History Management is supported for several actions, e.g. log on/out information, modification on
system information, and change on database information (addition, modification or deletion). User
history can be issued by report in occurrence of problem.

14) Distributed Processing Structure

 Separate installation of IDTECK STANDARD (Main Access Control Program), IDTECK Communication
Serverand Database server are supported. When Distributed Processing Structure is adopted, each server
became exclusive hence provide reliable management.

15) Mass Storage Database Support

 Microsoft SQL 2005 Databaseis supported.

16) The Latest UI Support

 Standard Window Interface and the latest UI are adopted hence IDTECK STANDARD provides perceptive
and unified interface.

17) Card Printer Support

 Supports all card printers (Recommanded Fargo)

 System Layout

Uni-site/Single site Layout

 Below imagerepresents uni-site layout when the program is installed on single building or single
company. Hereeach of IDTECK STANDARD, IDTECK Communication Serverand Database Server (MS-SQL)
is installed on exclusive PC and recommended for large size site.All of three programs can be installed
onto single PC and this is acceptable for middle or small size site.

14
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

Multi-site Layout

 Belowimage represents multi-site layout. Assuming 3 different sites exist, 1 head office and 2 branch
offices which constructed with an access control system in the each site respectively.It is permitted to
operate the STANDARDfor 2 Branch Offices fromthe Head Office. Managing STANDARD from each site
is also available.Case like below represents middle/large scale of site we recommend to hold individual
PC for IDTECK STANDARD, IDTECK Communication Serverand Database Server (MS-SQL).

15
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Installation Environment

Classification Requirement Remark

General Operating System Each Operating System


Windows XP Home/Professional requires to be installed with

Windows Vista up to date service pack and


security patch.
Windows 7
Server Operating System
Operating System Windows 2003 Server
Windows 2008 Server
*Windows 95,98,ME,NT and 2000(professional and
server) doesn’t support.
* It only supports 32 bit operating system.(It doesn’t
support 64 bit operating system)

Processor(CPU) Pentium Ⅳ or Higher

Memory(RAM) 2GB or Higher

Hard(HDD) More than 20GB space

65,536 Color(16bit color) viewed at 1024 x 768


Display(VGA)
resolution

Drive(CD-ROM) Over 8 Double Speed Drive Recommended

Each Database requires to


MS-SQL2008 Express Edition(Free) be installed with up to date
Database(DB)
MS-SQL2008 Server(Separate Purchase Required) service pack and security
patch.

16
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

1.2 Installation

1.2.1 Installation Flow Chart

Below is the flow of Installing IDTECK STANDARD. Please proceed the installing process as follows.

1. Install IDTECK STANDARD Program. Install IDTECK STANDARD Program.

In case of trying on Demo or Lite, installing Keylock Driver is not


necessary. In case of Demo version, the number of registerable Users is
limited to 10. Lite version is limited up to 500 users and 10 doors.
2. Install Keylock Driver.
Installation of Keylock Driver is required for proper use.
The number of Users(unlimited, 5000,1000) and functions(maximum 4)
is determined depending on the types of keylock driver.

1.2.2 IDTECK STANDARD Program Installation

This chapter explains installation of STANDARD program.

 Installation Precautions

The default database included in IDTECK STANDARD is Microsoft SQL Server 2008 Express Edition. IDTECK
STANDARD can be installedonly on an operating system with the latest service pack applied. Especially for
the Windows XP environment, the OSshould have been upgraded with SP3. If you install Microsoft SQL
Server 2008 Express Edition on Windows XP SP2 orlower, this can cause system malfunction or blue screen
due to an abnormal operation.

During the installation of Microsoft SQL Server 2008 Express Edition, you are prompted to install MSXM6 if it
has not been installed. Installing MSXML6 on Windows XP SP3 will cause an error during the process. If this
is the case, referto the troubleshooting section in this manual.

The setup process of Microsoft SQL Server 2008 Express is not included on IDTECK STANDARD Client.

 Program Installation

From the installation CD, run the IDTECK STANDARD executable, “IDTECK STANDARD
Server_vx.xx.xx_yyyymmdd.exe”.ForIDTECK STANDARD Client, run “IDTECK STANDARD
Client_vx.xx.xx_yyyymmdd.exe”.

Select a language for the installation process and click [OK].

17
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

The Setup guide screen appears. If you want to continue, click [Next].

IDTECK STANDARD requires Microsoft .NET Framework 2.0. for normal operation.Click [Yes] to start installing
Microsoft .NET Framework 2.0.

18
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 If Microsoft .NET Framework 2.0 is already installed on the PC where you will install IDTECK STANDARD,
this step can beskipped. Move to step 10.

Please wait until Setup is ready to install Microsoft .NET Framework 2.0.

Now the system is ready to install Microsoft .NET Framework 2.0. Click [Next] to continue.

Check [I agreed] on the terms of the License Agreement and click [Install].

19
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

Setup will start installing Microsoft .NET Framework 2.0. Wait until the installation process is completed.

When Microsoft .NET Framework 2.0. is installed completely, click [Finish].

20
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

You will see the Setup screen of IDTECK STANDARD when IDTECK STANDARD is ready for installation. Click
[Next].

21
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

The next screen will show you a list of components of Microsoft SQL Server 2008 Express required by IDTECK
STANDARD. Select a component(s) and click [Next].

 IDTECK STANDARD Client does not show you this screen. Skip to step 19 for your reference.

 If any of these component is already installed with Microsoft SQL Server 2008 or Microsoft SQL
Server2008Express, it will be unchecked accordingly.

The selected component(s) will be installed. Wait until the component(s) is installed completely.

22
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

When it is done, the system will restart Windows. Select [Restart the system] and click [OK] to restart the system.

When the system restarts, run the IDTECK STANDARD executable, “IDTECK STANDARD
Server_vx.xx.xx_yyyymmdd.exe(IDTECK STANDARD Client_vx.xx.xx_yyyymmdd.exe)” again.

Select a language for the installation process and click [OK].

The Setup Wizard screen appears. If you want to continue, click [Next].

23
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

When the components are installed completely, you will see the Setup screen of Microsoft SQL Server 2008
Express as shown. Select “Microsoft SQL Server 2008 Express” and click [Next].

Select an installation method of Microsoft SQL Server 2008 Express Edition. To perform auto installation,select
[Defaut Installation] and click [Next]. If you want to install Microsoft SQL Server 2008 Expressmanually,
select [Custom Installation] and click [Next].

Basic Setting

 In [Defaut Installation], the instance name is “IDTECK” and the “sa” logon password is “1234” by
default.Remember the instance name and “sa”logon password in case you might want to change the
information.This information will be required for the database setting of IDTECK STANDARD.

24
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD


 Please wait until [Defaut Installation] is completed. It may take a while to complete the installation,
depending onthe PC specifi cations.

25
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD


 When [Defaut Installation] for Microsoft SQL Server 2008 Express is completed, you will see the
Setup screen ofIDTECK STANDARD.

User-defined Installation

 If you select [Custom Installation], make sure to set the “Log On” information for Microsoft SQL Server
2008 Express to “Local System”.

The user-defined settings will begin. Please wait. It may take a while to complete the installation, depending
onthe PC specifications.

26
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD


 The Setup screen of Microsoft SQL Server 2008 Express Edition appears.


 From the left menu pane, select “Installation”.

27
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD


 From the context menu in the right pane, select “New SQL Server stand-alone installation or add
features to anexisting installation” to proceed.


 When the “Setup Support Rules” checking process is completed, click [OK].

28
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD


 You don’t need to provide the product key for Microsoft SQL Server 2008 Express.Click “Next”.


 If you agree on the license agreement, check “I accept the license terms” and click [Next].

29
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD


 When the “Setup Support Files” checking process is completed, click “Install”.


 In the “Setup Support Rules” screen, check if Microsoft SQL Server 2008 Express can be installed in
the currentenvironment. If all items are displayed as “Success” or “Warning” in the Status fi eld, you
can proceed withinstallation of SQL Server 2008. Check the Status fi eld and click [Next].

 If “Status” is displayed as “Warning”, this is a recommendation. If “Status” is displayed as “Error”, this


indicates thata required file or setting is not installed, consult with a SQL server expert or contact
Microsoft for technical help.When the problem is solved, click “Re-run” and check “Setup Support rules”
again.

30
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD


 Select all feature items in “Feature Selection” and check the path. Then, click [Next].


 From “Installation Confi guration”, select “Named Instance”. The default instance name is
“SQLExpress”.Rename is as “IDTECK”. Click [Next].

31
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD


 In “Disk Space Requirements”, check the free space for installation. In case of an insuffi cient free
space,return to the previous step, “Instance Confi guration”, and change the location of the instance
root directory.

32
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD


 The “Server Confi guration” window appears. In the “Service Accounts” tab, select “Local System”
or “System” for the “Account Name” of both “SQL Server Database Engine” and “SQL Server
Browser”.

 If the account name is other than “Local System” or “System”, Microsoft SQL Server 2008 Express will
not be runautomatically.


 From the “Database Engine Confi guration” window, move to the “Account Provisioning” tab. From
the “Authentication Mode” area, select “Mixed Mode(SQL Server authentication and Windows
authentication”. In “Enter Password” and “Confi rm Password”, provide the “sa” login information
required to access Microsoft SQLServer 2008 Express. Don’t forget the password. Memorize or keep
it recorded.

 The password is required for access to the IDTECK STANDARD database.

33
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 In the “Specify SQL Server administrators” area, add as many users as you want to grant the
“Windowauthentication” account. Click [Add Current User] to add the current user account. If you
want to add otheruser, click [Add] and select a different user. Click [Next].


 From the “Error and Usage Reporting“ window, decide if you report a problem to Microsoft, which
may occurwhile using Microsoft SQL Server 2008 Express. Click [Next].


 “Installation Rules” checks the necessary items for installation.

 If you have a problem with installation, consult with a SQL server expert or contact Microsoft for
technical help, andclick “Re-run” to check the “Setup Support Rules”.

34
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD


 “Ready to Install” confi rms the installation related settings. When done, click “Install” to start the
installation process.


 Microsoft SQL Server 2008 Express Edition will be installed.

35
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD


 During the installation, the completion message for each installed item will appear. When all items
are installedcompletely, click [Next].

 If you have a problem with installation, consult with a SQL server expert or contact Microsoft for
technical help, andclick “Re-run” to check the “Setup Support Rules”.


 Click [Close] to exit the installation.

36
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD


 Exit “SQL Server Installation Center” and proceed with installation of IDTECK STANDARD.

 When the [User-defined] installation of Microsoft SQL Server 2008 Express is completed, you will see
theSetup screen of IDTECK STANDARD.

Provide the user information and click [Next].

Select one or more that you want to install from 3 components of IDTECK STANDARD and click [Next].

In case that the file is IDTECK STANDARD Client, you can select only one IDTECK STANDARD Client.

37
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

You will see the installation screen of a database used by IDTECK STANDARD. In the [Server to install(D):] input
box,provide the information of the server that has been installed with the Microsoft SQL Server 2008
Express Edition.The server information consists of: “server name or server IP address\instance name”. If you
have installedMicrosoft SQL Server 2008 Express (included in IDTECK STANDARD installation CD) as the
default instance name, enter “(local)\IDTECK”. If Microsoft SQL Server 2008 (Express) is installed on a
remote computer, provide the name ofthe remote server or enter the server IP address with the instance
name.

 Check the [Authenticate the server using the following login ID and password] option. You must
enter “sa” in the [Login ID(L):] input box. In [Password (P):], provide the password for “sa” that you
specified when installingMicrosoft SQL Server 2008 (Express).

 Click [Next].

38
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

From the [Browser] dialog, specify the installation folder of IDTECK STANDARD and click [Next].

Check the IDTECK STANDARD components to install, and click [Next].

 IDTECK STANDARD Server


Click [Finish] to finish the installation.

39
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

40
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

1.2.3 License Keylock Driver Installation

After the installation, USB100(Green) or Fetian(Blue) keylock is required if the user wishes to process to ‘official
version’. In case of formal version, the number of visitors(unlimited, 5000, 1000) and functions(maximum 4)is set
depending on the types of keylock. Program function can be selected only once according to the number of
functions when the program is operated initially.
Without keylock, some function of STANDARD(Card design + Visitor + Video + part of Time and attendance) has
limited use. Free version is limited with until 500 users and 10 doors control. With the demo version, you can register
maximum 10 visitors

In order to install keylock drver you need to use driver file. Driver can be found in providedProgram CD,
within‘Keylock Driver’ folder. Also you can find the detail installation guide file. Please refer to the Keylock
Drive_Install Guide_English(Rev-yyyymmdd).pdf file.

 Keylock driver version

Classification Contents

Unlimited

The number of visitors(Mandatory) 5000

1000

Visitor
The number of functions
Card design
(Optional)- Maximum 4
Video

Part of Time and attendance (Shift)

41
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

2. CONFIGURATION

2.1 Initial Configuration

2.1.1 Connection Environment Setting (STANDARD Program)

If using IDTECKSTANDARD Program for the first time after installation, Server connection environment is required to
be arranged by ‘IDTECK Config Program’. (For Window7 x64, Select compatibility in config attributes when starting
IDTECK STANDARD server. Check authority level [Play this program with Administrator authority] and click apply
button then select compatibility in server attributes. Check authority level [Play this program with Administrator
authority] and click apply button.)

 Operation Flow

 Start->Programs->IDTECK->IDTECKSTANDARD->IDTECKSTANDARD Config

 Setting Method

 Enter IP address of Database or name of Database. If Database server is installed on same PC, enter
(local)\IDTECK. If there is instance name of SQL server should input ‘(local)\Instance name’ format.

 Enter name of Database that STANDARD use. Generally named ‘STARWATCH_STD’.

 Enter User ID and Password which give access to Database server.

 Click ‘Connection Test’ to test the connection. Please refer to below check list, in case of failing
connection to Database.

 Insert the entire set up process and click ‘OK’.

CHECK LIST(ONLY IF FAIL TO CONNECT TO DATABASE)

Check Database Server has been installed and work properly

Check Database Server address (Host) has been entered correctly.

Check instance name of database.

Check Database Name is ‘STARWATCH_STD’.

42
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

Check User ID and Password match to information on Database Server.

Check Port setting or Connection environment setting is properly arranged. Check Firewall status

Support the connection to corresponding port.

43
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

2.1.2 Connection Environment Setting (Communication Server)

If IDTECKCommunicationServer is installed for the first time, configuring database server connection environment is
priority. After configure database connection environment, do not terminate communication server program but stay
operating. Then confirm the connection test with communication server and whether program is operating or not.

 Operation Flow

 Start->Programs->IDTECK->Communication Server

 Setting Method

 Select ‘Server Setup’ from Main screen.

 Select ‘Database’ from Server setup screen.

 Fill out IP Address of Database or Name of Database Server on Server IP box. If Database server is
installed on same PC, enter (local)\IDTECK. If database has instance name should input ‘(local)\Instance
nsme’ format.

 Enter name of Database that STANDARD use. Generally named ‘IDTECK_STD’.

 Enter User ID and Password which give access to Database server.

 Select authentication method.Select to DB server authentication.

 Click ‘OK’ and save setting information.

 Click ‘Restart Server’ on Main screen to check the connection status.

44
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD


 Select Server Setup again on main screen.

 Select Use Site on the screen of server setup. There are registered site list displayed.

 In Site ID input section, input sites ID refer to the site list.

 Press OK button then, save setting information.

 Check database server connection by pressing restart server on main screen.

 Select authentication method. Select to DB server authentication.

 Click ‘OK’ and save setting information.

 Do not close the communication server. Keep it running.

45
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

2.1.3 MileStone Server Configuration

To link IDTECK STANDARD to milestone server, install milestone system software and register a key lock. See the
website: http://www.milestonesys.com

The image below shows a screenshot of Milestone Server products, which can be linked with IDTECK STANDARD. Red
highlights indicate that the product can be linked. See the following website:
(http://www.milestonesys.com/Software/XProtect-IP-Video-Surveillance/xprotectproducts/)

 Operation Flow

 Install IDTECK STANDARD, and it is installed in C:\Program Files\IDTECK\IDTECK STANDARD Server.


Milestone Time Sync folder shown on the screen contains an execution file and a batch file. Copy and
paste the two files into an arbitrary location within the PC on which Milestone Server is installed and
run the file named regDateTimeServer.bat.

 Reboot the PC after it. This enables Enterprise to sync time with Milestone Server. (Ref: STANDARD
Tool>Option>Video>Sets PC time by Milestone Server Time)

46
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

2.1.4 Log on

 Operation Flow

 Start->Programs->IDTECK->IDTECKSTANDARD->IDTECKSTANDARD

 Setting Method

 ID+Password mode screen.

 Default User ID and Password is ‘admin’ respectively.

 Insert Login ID (User ID):‘admin’.

 Insert Password:‘admin’.

 Click ‘Login’.

47
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

2.1.5 License Setting

 Setting Method

 License Setting : Configuration is available only once when you run a program initially. Choose desired
function depending on the number of functions. If the number of function is upgraded, you can redo
license setting but existing sets are not able to be changed.

 The number of license users : Displays the number of registrable visitors.(Unlimited, 5000, 1000)

 The number of license functions : Displays the number of functions available to use(Maximum 4)

 Licese Setting will not be shown under 0 function(Access Only) or 4 functions(Use all functions).

 Click the function desired to use and click Apply button.

48
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

2.1.6 Building-Floor Setting

 Operation Flow

 Go to Main Tool Bar-> Click ‘System Management’ -> Click ‘Building-Floor Setting’

 Setting Method

 Click ‘New’< > button from upper tool bar.

 Insert Building Name.

 Select floors to be included in the building and find floors from left column and click < > button to
move those floors on right column. Otherwise Drag and Drop those floors by mouse.

 Click ‘Save’< > button from tool bar and complete registration.

49
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

2.1.7 Site Setting

 Operation Flow

 Go to Main Tool Bar-> Click ‘System Management’ -> Click ‘Site Setting’

 Setting Method

 Click ‘New’< > button from upper tool bar.

 Insert Site Name. Site Name refers to where Communication Server is installed. In the case having
different PCs on one location or one PC on one location, either way Name the ‘Site Name’ as same as
the Company name so it is easy to recognize.

 Insert Communication Server IP. i.e. IP address of the PC which Communication Server is installed.

 Insert Port number. The default port value is 51008 which give connection to Communication Server.

 Click ‘Connection Test’ and Check whether it connects to Communication Server properly.

50
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Screen above shows ‘Site connection was successful’ message, which is indicating the Connection
Environment Setting is well prepared. Connection between STANDARD Program and Communication
Server is successful.

 Check ‘whether to use it or not’. Check if one prefers to use Communication Server of currently
registering site. If not, undo the check.

 Click ‘Save’< > button from tool bar.

Check List(Only if Site Connection Test fail)

Check Communication Server (STANDARD) is running.

Check IP address of PC with Communication Server Program and IP address inserted on box match.

Check Port number 51008 is blocked by Network Firewall or Window’s Firewall.

51
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

2.1.8 LoopSetting

 Operation Flow

 Go to Main Tool Bar-> Click ‘System Management’ -> Click ‘LoopSetting’

 Setting Method

 Click ‘New’( ) from tool bar.Information will initialize in all boxes.

 Select Site Name for use. Displayed information is same as the one entered while registration.

 Insert Loop Name.

 Select communication type as ‘Serial Communication’.

 Check ‘whether to use it or not’. If one undoes the check, Loop inactivates.

 Set Polling Speed as default value 50.

If select communication type as serial communication, set to options as below.

52
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Select the Serial Communication setting tab.

 Select Communication Port for serial communication.

 Select Communication Speed of communication port. Default of LX device is 57600bps, the others are
9600bps.

 Select ‘Save’ ( ) button.

If select communication type as network communication, set to options as below.


 <In case of auto registration>

 Select Network Communication setting tab.

 Click ‘’Auto Search Loop’ to search the converter and device on the network.

 Select one from ‘Searched loop list’ and move down to below grid.

53
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Set IP Address, Subnet Mask, Gateway, Port, Baud Rate etc and click ‘Apply’ button to apply set value to
the applicable converter and device.

 Click ‘Save’ ( ) button.

 <In case of manual registration >

1.
 Click Manual Registrationbutton.

 Input IP address, port, baud rate. (The lest of the data is not available for input. In case of manual
registration, setting values cannot be applied. You need to set all of information using sperated LAN
converter setting software.)

 Click Save( ) button of tool bar on the top of screen.

54
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

2.1.9 Device Setting

 Operation Flow

 Go to Main Tool Bar-> Click ‘System Management’ -> Click ‘Device Setting’

 Setting Method

 Click ‘New’( ) from tool bar.

 Information will initialize in all boxes.

 Select ‘Site Name’. Select the Site Name which is registered.

 Select ‘Loop Name’. Select the Loop Name which is registered.

 Go to ‘Basic Setting’ tab.

 Select ‘Controller’ from ‘Device Type’.

 Select device type. This manual describes iTDC as standard.

 Select type of door device. iTDC applies‘2 Door’, ‘3 Door’ and ‘4 Door’ by one controller, so select door
type you wish to use. The others are ‘1 Door’.

 Select device address. Controller has communication address. For example, if you set to communication
address for 2 iTDC, address of the first iTDC is ‘001’ and ‘002’for the second iTDC. Select the matching
device address as the device address set to the iTDC.

55
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Insert Device Name.

 Check ‘whether to use it or not’.

 Go to operation tab. Use as default value here. Check more description in the phase 4.


 Go to the controller option tab. Use as default value here.


 Click ‘Save’( ) from tool bar.

56
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

2.1.10 DoorSetting

 Operation Flow

 Go to Main Tool Bar-> Click ‘System Management’ -> Click ‘DoorSetting’

 Setting Method

 Select ‘New’ ( ) button on toolbar.

 All information is initialized on input space

 Select the Site Name.

 Select The Loop Name.

 Select device name that the device controls the door.

57
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Depending on selected device, selectable door lists are displayed. In case of iTDC controller is available
to set to maximum of 4 doors, the others are only 1 door. Select door information to add or change in
tab list.

 Add or change door name.

 Select building-floor to recognize location of door.

 Set to door operating time. That means the time for door lock is unlocked.

 Select Auto Lock Device Operating Time setting. It means the time for door lock is automatically
unlocked. Default is ‘not in use’.

 If you would like to work to set to door in graphic map, select using of graphic map icon. You can set
to graphic map on graphic map setting.

 Next is description of setting the reader which belongs to door. Depending on door type of reader
device, set to entrance reader and exit reader.

 Select the Entrance Reader (reader1).

 Select the Entrance Reader to ‘use’ or ‘not in use’.

 Input the Reader Name.

 Select the Reader Type. In case of normal RF Card reader, select‘Proximity reader’ and the case of
contained keypad, select the ‘Proximity reader + Keypad’. If biometric recognition reader is connected to
entrance reader (iTDC, iCON100), select the ‘Biometric recognition reader’.

 To set what kind of biometric recognition reader is connected to entrance reader, select information
about biometric recognition reader.

 Select the ‘Reader operating mode’. If you authenticate by only the RF card, select the ‘RF Only’. Andif
you authenticate by RF card with password, select the ‘RF+Password’. If you authenticate by RF card
with biometric select the ‘RF+FINGERPRINT (Password)’ or the‘RF+PASSWORD+FINGERPRINT’.

 Select Time Schedule for Reader Operating Mode to ‘use’ or ‘not in use’. During using of reader
operating mode, if the mode in the time set to the schedule sector, reader operating mode is
automatically changed to ‘RF ONLY’. Set to Time Schedule for Reader Operating Mode.

 If there is exit reader of door, select exit reader (Reader 2) to ‘use’ or ‘not in use’. In case of 4 Doors
type of iTDC controller, you cannot select exit reader.

 Input the Reader Name.

 Select the Reader Type. In case of normal RF Card reader, select‘Proximity reader’ and the case of
contained keypad, select the ‘Proximity reader + Keypad’. If biometric recognition reader is connected to
entrance reader (iTDC, iCON100), select the ‘Biometric recognition reader’.

 To set what kind of biometric recognition reader is connected to entrance reader, select information
about biometric recognition reader.

58
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Select the ‘Reader operating mode’. If you authenticate by only the RF card, select the ‘RF Only’. Andif
you authenticate by RF card with password, select the ‘RF+Password’. If you authenticate by RF card
with biometric, select the ‘RF+FINGERPRINT (Password)’ or the‘RF+PASSWORD+FINGERPRINT’.

 Select the Time Schedule for Reader Operating Mode to ‘use’ or ‘not in use’. During using of reader
operating mode, if the mode in the time set to the schedule sector, reader operating mode is
automatically changed to ‘RF ONLY’. Set to Time Schedule for Reader Operating Mode.

 Set to reader operating mode time schedule.

 If select the Time Schedule for Reader Operating Mode to ‘use’ or ‘not in use’, set to time schedule for
reader operating mode.

 In case of using of iTDC controller, depending on door type, you can add door 2, 3 and 4. Set to
connected door 2, 3 and 4 as before.

 Click the ‘Save’ ( ) button to save setting information.

 Click the ‘Send’ ( ) button to send inputted door information. (In case of the sending function, it
operates when communication server works as normal and the communication server is communicating
with device. When the communication has problem, error message is generated. If the error message
comes up, check the communication server or the communication of controller.

59
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

2.1.11 Reader Point Setting

 Operation Flow

 Go to Main Tool Bar-> Click ‘System Management’ -> Click ‘Reader Point Setting’

 Setting Method

 Setting for Reader point of contact helps you to set to generating output from reader. If you wish to
use as default, you don’t have to set this function.

 Select theSite Name.

 Select the Loop Name.

 Select the Device Name.

 On reader select screen, applicable reader operating lists are displayed. Select the reader operating
information to change.

 Select the output then change the time.

 Click the ‘Save’ ( ) button to save setting information.

60
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

2.1.12 InputPoint Setting

 Operation Flow

 Go to Main Tool Bar-> Click ‘System Management’ -> Click ‘Input PointSetting’

 Setting Method

 Setting for Input point of contact helps you to set to generating output from Input. If you wish to use

 As default, you don’t have to set this function.

 Select theSite Name.

 Select the Loop Name.

 Select the Device Name.

 On reader select screen, applicable reader operating lists are displayed. Select the reader operating
information to change.

 Input the Input Name.

 Select the Input Type.

61
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Select the Signal Type.

 Select the Signal Type. (Only supportive devices can be selected.)

 Set to input time schedule. Input Time Schedule processes in only the matching time schedule sector. It
depends on device so check device manual.

 Select building and floor to recognize location of input point of contact.

 Select graphic to ‘use’ or ‘not in use’ if you wish to use graphic. Select icon.

 Detail setting of graphic map is able in graphic setting.

 Select Output Time setting tab if you wish to change the output time from generated input. Select the
output then change the time.

 Click the ‘Save’ ( ) button.

62
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

2.1.13 OutputPoint Setting

 Operation Flow

 Go to Main Tool Bar-> Click ‘System Management’ -> Click ‘OutputPointSetting’

 Setting Method

 It defines output. If you wish to use as default, you don’t have to setting this.

 Select the Site Name.

 Select the Loop Name.

 Select the Device Name. .

 On output select screen, list of the output connected to matching device is displayed. Select output
information to change in list.

 Input Output Point of Contact Name.

 Select Output Point of Contact Type.

63
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Set to output time schedule. Output time schedule generates forced output in matching time schedule
sector.

 Select Building and Floor to recognize location of output point of contact.

 Select Graphic to ‘use’ if you wish to use in graphic. Select icon.

 Detail setting if graphic map is able in graphic setting.

 Click the ‘Save’button ( ) to save setting information.

64
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

2.1.14 Company Setting

 Operation Flow

 Go to Main Tool Bar-> Click ‘Operation Management’ -> Click ‘Company Setting’

 Setting Method

 Click ‘New’( ) from tool bar.

 Information will initialize in all boxes.

 Insert Company Name. In case changing the Logo is necessary, register Logo.

 Click ‘Save’< > button from tool bar.

65
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

2.1.15 Access Group Setting

 Operation Flow

 Go to Main Tool Bar-> Click ‘Access Control’ -> Click ‘Access Group Setting’

 Setting Method

 Click ‘New’( ) from tool bar.

 Information will initialize in all boxes.

 Select Company.

 Insert Access Group Name.

 Select Time schedule to be applied and select the Door. Select from list of Door and Access Group.
Select ‘Time schedule Not use’ since time schedule is not set in earlier setting stage.

 Move the selected Door to right side of screen by Drag and Drop.

66
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Click ‘Save’< > button from tool bar.

2.1.16 Cardholder Management

 Operation Flow

 Go to Main Tool Bar-> Click ‘Access Control’ -> Click ‘Cardholder management’

 Setting Method

 Click ‘New’( ) from tool bar.

 Information will initialize in all boxes.

 Insert Employee ID.

 Insert User Name.

 Select Company.

 Select Department (Displays mapped department in Company-Department set-up after registering at


operation of main tool bar.)

 Go to ‘Access Card Information’ Tab.

67
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 O

 Check ‘whether to use card or not’.

 Select Card Type. Here, select Access Card.

 Insert Card Number. Insert 8 digit number for 125KHZ card, 10 digit number for 13.56MHZ mifare card.

 Insert 4 digit password. This password is needed when Access Authentication Device is Keypad type.
Also when the authentication mode is set as Card+Password.

 Select Card Mode.

 Select Output Level (LX Only).

 Access group: Select one of registered access group or check ‘whether or not to set individual door’
and select individual door if you don’t want to use access group. In the list on left side, doors not
registered in the access group are displayed if you selected access group. And registrable doors are
displayed if you selected individual door option. To move into access door list on right side, select a
door you wish to access and double click it or click (>) button or drag and drop.
 Elevator access group: Select one in registered elevator access group. Click issue button at the bottom
and register a card to use.

 Save set-up information by clicking save( ) button in tool bar at the top of the screen. If the save
succeeds, transmittion message to whether to transmit the information is displayed and entered user
information is transmitted to device if you click Yes(Y).

 Click ‘Issue’ button and register the Card.

 Click ‘Save’< > button from tool bar.

68
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Click ‘Send’( ) button to transmit the saved User Information. (Send function operates when
Communication Server properly run and Device is communicating. In case of any communication failure,
Error message appears. Then please check Communication Server or Controller.)

69
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

3. PROGRAM LAYOUT
This chapter explicates three points. All kinds of button (icon) in IDTECKSTANDARD Program. Detail of setting process
for Database connection. Main screen layout of IDTECKSTANDARD.

3.1 Common Screen and Buttons

3.1.1 Icon Description

This chapter includes the description of icons in IDTECKSTANDARDprogram. All icons are commonly used in
IDTECKSTANDARD and those icons operate specific function. Following table shows the Description for each icon.

 Main Tool Bar Icons

Below icons are commonly used for main screen.

Image Name Description

Refresh To Refresh searched results.

Add To Add new data on Registration Screen.

Modify To Modify data on Change Screen.

Delete To Delete data.

BatchTransmit To Transmit searched data to the device.

Batch Receive To Receive data from specific device.

To Transmit data to the selected device. (If you enter new or modified data is
Send
transferred after save..)

Receive To Receive data from specific device.

Close To Close the screen.

Help To display Help on each menu.

 Other Icons

70
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

Below icons are used in New Registration screen or Modification screen.

Image Name Description

Save Save inserted Data onto the Database.

Search To display Searched result or Move to Search screen.

Cancel To Cancel the action.

Next To display Next Data.

Previous To display Previous Data.

3.1.2 Screen Layout

AdoptWindow’s standard interface in order to maximize the user conveniences.

Name Description

 Title Bar Displays Program Name, Minimize, Maximize and Close buttons.

71
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Program Menu Buttons Able to select Log off and Program Shut down.
 Menu Bar Able to execute Program menus.
 Tool Box Able to execute Search menus or functions that affects entire program.
 Taskpad Able to separate tasks into Work and Search.
 Device Window Displays all registered devices corresponding to its connection status.
 Connection Status Window Displays connection status of Site, Loop, and Controller and control them.
 Work Flow Window Displays tasks according to order and execute them.
 Status Bar Displays connection status between Account and site.

 Tool Box

 Company Selection: Select the Company.

 If user selects‘All’, entire company’s data will be treated, and if user selects a specific company,
selected company’s data will be treated. If one’s not anAdministrator, information will not display.

 Refresh( ): Reload contents from Device tab and Status tab on left-bottom side of screen.

 Add( ): Display registration screen related to search screen, so user can Add new data.

 Modify( ): Display registration screen related to search screen, so user can modify data.

 Delete( ): Delete the selected search research.

 Send( ): Send the selected search research to device.

 Receive( ):

 Batch Transmit( ):

 Batch Receive( ):

 Close( ): Close the menu.

 Help( ): Display the help.

 Device Window

 Display all the registered devices.

72
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Dis-configured Reader, In-Insert or Output will be displayed as Unavailable.

 Select the Device and right click, menu below will appear then modify data for the device.

 Connection Status Window

 Displays connection status of Site, Loop, and Controller.

 If Device is not connected, that device is marked with red colour.

 If Device is connected, connected icon( ) will be displayed, or if disconnected, disconnected icon( )


will be displayed on right side.

 In order to change site connection status, select desired Site and right click then below menu will be
displayed. Click ‘Menu’ and modify the connection status. Displayed menu differs depend on current

connection status. Select desired Site and click ‘Connected’( ) or ‘Disconnected’( ) to change
connection status.

73
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

4. SYSTEM SETTINGS

4.1 Setting Wizard

4.1.1 Device Setting Wizard

This is Device Setting Wizard.

 Screen Setting

Device Setting Wizard–Site Setting

 Registered Site List: Displays the site list you want to use. Check whether or not to use the site in the
check box and try connection test. Move on to next step only when connection is successful.

 Site setting: This is used to register new site.


 Connection Test: Test connection status of communication server by using registered site’s IP and port
number. If connection error occurs, check IP address and port number one more time or check whether
communication server is normally operated or not.

Device Setting Wizard – Communication Type Setting

74
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD


 Select Communication Type. Select one between ‘Serial Communication and ‘Network Communication.

 After selecting Communication Type, click ‘Next’ button.

Device Setting Wizard – Loop Setting (Serial Communication)

 You can only set serial communication in this section. If you use TCP/IP, please refer to ‘TCP/IP Setting’
in this manual.

 Click the ‘Loop Setting’ and input Loop Name. Select the communication port which is connected with
communication of the device. Select communication speed of connected device. Depending on device,
communication speed is different, so check the device first then select the matched communication
speed.

 After loop Setting is finished, select the loop you wish to use then click the ‘Next’ button.

75
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 For searching connected controller on communication line, define controller address to search. Click
‘Auto Search Controller’. It automatically searchs connected controller. Searched devices are displayed
on the list. Select the controller you wish to use then click the ‘Down Arrow’ to register. If registering is
completed, click the ‘Next’ button to finish setting. (You can update loops that are manually registered
from Loop Definition before, by clicking Auto Search Controller button.)

 This step is to check set information. Check the setting is correct and click the ‘Save’ button to finish all
setting.

Device Setting Wizard – Loop Setting (Network Communication)


 This dispay is for Network Communication Setting.

76
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Automatically search the connected network and controllers in same network and register the controller
you want to use among searched controllers.

 Click ‘Auto Search Loop’ button to search controllers connected in same network. Displays searched
controllers on the ‘Searched Loop List’. Click the controller you want to use on the ‘Searched Controller

List’ and drag and drop to below grid. You can also use ( ) or ( ) button to register or delete the
controller. To each registered controller, change Network Setting information by selecting applicable
column to suit for network environment of installed site. Click ‘Apply’ button to apply changed
information to the controller. Click ‘Next’ button.

Device Setting Wizard – Device Setting (Network Communication)


 This step is for Device Setting. Automatically seachs the controller for communication by using privously
set loop and register the controller you want to use among searched contollers. Set the range of
controller address to be searched. From address’0’ to adress‘1’ is searched as the default setting. Click
‘Auto Search Controller’ button to search the cotroller in selected range of address. Searched controller
is displayed on ’Searched Controller List’. Click the controller you want to use on the ‘Searched

Controller List’ and drag and drop to below ‘Regostered Controller List’. You can also use ( ) or ( )
button to register or delete the controller. To each registered controller, change the device name by
selecting applicable column. Click ‘Next’ button.


 This Step is to check Settng Information. Check previously set Controller Setting and Click ‘Save’ button’.

77
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

4.2 Building Setting

4.2.1 Building-Floor Setting

Register the Building and Floor.

 Screen Setting

Building-Floor Setting.

Register the Building and Floor.

 Building Name: Insert Building Name (Name of the building that you will install access control system)
to register.

 Description: Insert any details on building.

 Floor list to be registered: List of floors which not registered.

 Registered Floor list: List of floors which registered.

 Function Description

Building-Floor Setting

 Building-Floor Registration

 Click ‘New’ from Tool Bar.

 Insert the Building Name.(Required step)

78
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Click ‘Right’< > and ‘Left’< > to move floors to be included in the building.

 Click ‘Save’< > and complete the registration.

 Building-Floor Modification

 Go to Combo-box on left-top side of screen and select the building to be modified.

 It is possible to select the building by clicking ‘Previous’< > and ‘Next’< > or directly select
from Combo-box.

 Modify each item and click ‘Save’.

 Building-Floor Deletion

 Go to Combo-box on left-top side of screen and select the floor to be deleted.

 It is possible to select the floor by clicking ‘Previous’< > and ‘Next’< > or directly select from
Combo-box.

 Click ‘Delete’< > from Tool Bar.

 Building-Floor Search

 Click ‘Building-Floor Search’ on system setting tab from main screen or Click ‘Search’< > on tool
bar from registration screen. Screen below will be displayed.

 Set search condition as ‘Building Name’ and start search.

 Below search screen enables to select building.

 Select building and click ‘Delete’, then selected building will be deleted. Also ‘Modify’< > from
tool bar displays building information and on that screen, it’s able to modify each building.

79
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

4.3 Communication Environment Setting

4.3.1 Site Setting

Register or modify Site (Communication Server).

 Screen Description

Site Setting

 Tool bar: Display Buttons like; Site Information Search, Add, Modify, Delete, Help and Close.

 Site Name: Insert the Site Name. Select Site name where communication server is installed or direct site
name.

 Communication Server IP: Insert IP Address of Communication Server.

 Port: Insert the Network Port Number of that will connect to Communication Server. Default value is
51008. Default value 51008 may not be accessible depend on Network Security setting or Firewall
setting. In this case, open the Port through Network advisor.

 Connection Test: Test the connection to Communication Server through inserted IP Address, Port
Number, and Password. In case of Connection Error occur, double check the IP Address, Port Number,
and Password. Otherwise check whether Communication Server is operating or not.

 Whether Use or Not: Set whether to connect or not to the Site (Communication Server). If one does not
mark the check, even if Site information is set, Connection is inaccessible. In order to connect and
communicate with desired Site, marking is necessary.

 Description: In case of any additional information on Site, insert the additional information on
‘Description Box’

80
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Function Description

Search

 Click ‘Combo’ next to ‘Quick find’ on top of the window, Site Information will display. Insert data to be
searched, then information will display on the screen.

 Click ‘Arrow’( ) on Tool bar, then ‘Previous and Next’ Site Information will display.

 Click ‘Search’( ) on Tool bar, in case of Advanced Search is required. This case, go to Search screen of
Main screen.

Add Site(New Registration)

 Click ‘New’( ) on tool bar.

 Information will initialize in all boxes.

 Fill out information in all boxes. Yellow boxes are requisite fields. You should fill out Yellow boxes.

 Click ‘Save’( ) on tool bar.

Site Modification

 Click ‘Combo box’ next to ‘Quick find’ on top of the window, then Registered Site’s information will
display. Click desired data, then information will display on the screen.

 Click ‘Arrow’( ) on Tool bar, then ‘Previous and Next’ Site Information will display.

 Click ‘Save’( ), after modify desired item.

Site Deletion

 Click ‘Combo box’ next to ‘Quick find’ on top of the window, then Registered Site’s information will
display. Click desired data, then information will display on the screen.

 Click ‘Arrow’( ) on Tool bar, then ‘Previous and Next’ Site Information will display.

 Click ‘Delete’( ) on Tool bar.

81
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

4.3.2 LoopSetting

Register or modify Loop information depend on Communication Type. In case of Send, refer to below.

 Screen Description

LoopSetting(General Information)

Select whether to use Loop or not and Communication type. Then insert Basic information.

 Site Name: Select the site. Select Site name where communication server is installed or direct site name.

 Loop Name: Insert the Loop Name.

 Communication Type: Select Polling or Event type. (Default value: Polling. Polling is recommended.)

 Whether Use or Not: Set whether to connect or not to Loop. If one does not mark the check, even if
Loop information is set, Connection is inaccessible. In order to connect and communicate with desired
Loop, marking is necessary.

 Polling Speed: Select the speed of Polling(Default value:200)

Loop Setting(Serial Communication)

 If you select communication type as serial, follow next step;

82
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD


 Select the Serial Communication setting tab.

 Select the Communication Port for Serial Communication.

 Select Communication Speed of communication port. Default of LX device is 57600bps, the others are
9600bps.

 Click the ‘Save’ ( ) button.

Loop Setting(Network Communication)

 If select Communication Type as Network Communication, set to menus as below.


 <IN CASE OF AUTO REGISTRATION>

 Select the Network Communication setting tab.

 Click ‘Auto Search Loop’ button to search the converter or device on the network.

 Select one on the ‘Searched Loop List’ and move down to the below grid.

 Set IP Subnet Mast, Gateway, Port, Communication Speed and click ‘Apply’ button to apply set value to
applicable converter and device.

83
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Click the ‘Save’ ( ) button.

 <IN CASE OF MANUAL REGISTRATION>


 Click Manual Registrationbutton.

 Input IP address, port, baud rate. (The lest of the data is not available for input. In case of manual
registration, setting values cannot be applied.)

 Click Save( ) button of tool bar on the top of screen.

 Function Description

Search

 Click ‘Combo’ next to ‘Quick find’ on top of the window, Site Information will display. Insert data to be
searched, then information will display on the screen.

 Click ‘Arrow’( ) on Tool bar, then ‘Previous and Next’ Site Information will display.

 Click ‘Search’( ) on Tool bar, in case of Advanced Search is required. This case, go to Search screen of
Main screen.

Loop Addition(New Registration)

 Click ‘New’( ) on tool bar.

 Information will initialize in all boxes.

84
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Fill out information in all boxes. Yellow boxes are requisite fields. You should fill out Yellow boxes.

 Selected Communication Type Tab will only become active, and insert information on the tab.

 Click ‘Save’( ) on tool bar.

Loop Modification

 Click ‘Combo box’ next to ‘Quick find’ on top of the window, then Registered Loop’s information will
display. Click desired data, then information will display on the screen.

 Click ‘Arrow’( ) on Tool bar, then ‘Previous and Next’ Site Information will display.

 Click ‘Save’( ), after modify desired item.

Loop Deletion

 Click ‘Combo box’ next to ‘Quick find’ on top of the window, then Registered Loop’s information will
display. Click desired data, then information will display on the screen.

 Click ‘Arrow’( ) on Tool bar, then ‘Previous and Next’ Site Information will display.

 Click ‘Delete’( ) on Tool bar.

85
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

4.4 Device and DoorSetting

4.4.1 Device Setting

 Screen Description

Device Setting(General Information)

 Select Communication Type of Loop and insert basic setting.


 Site Name: Select the desired Site. Which the device will be installed.

 Loop Name: Select the desired Loop. Which the device will be installed.

 Device Type: Select one, ‘Controller’ or ‘Biometric Reader’

Device Description

Select when Controller(iTDC, iTDCSR, LX505, LX505SR, LX007, LX007SR, 505R, SR505,
FINGER007, FINGER007SR, iCON100, iCON100SR, FGR007, FGR007SR, MAC1000) is used.

Controller Controller possess separate Communication Address(Address). Configure the software


information depend on each Address and Communicate with controller. Also it is able to set
various options for each controller. Transmit/Receive set options and apply on each device.

86
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

Select when Biometric Device, i.e. Fingerprint detectors (FGR006, FGR006SR, FINGER006,
FINGER006SR, LX006, and LX006SR) is used.

Biometric Biometric Reader setting is a part where setting biometric reader out of all readers
Reader connected to controller. Transmitting/Receiving the fingerprint of user can only be operated
under ‘Biometric Reader’ type. Also managing the reader is available under ‘Biometric
Reader’ type.

 Device type: If you select controller and biometric recognition reader, the matching device list is
displayed. Select the matching device. This manual describes iTDC as standard.

 Door type: Select device door type. iTDC applies‘2 Door’, ‘3 Door’ and 4 Door’ by one controller, select
door type you wish to use. The others are ‘1 Door’.

 Device address: Select device address. Controller has communication address. For example, if you set to
communication address for 2 iTDC, address of the first iTDC is ‘001’ and ‘002’for the second iTDC. Select
the matching device address as the device address set to the iTDC.

 Registered address is not displayed.

 Device Name: Insert the Device name.

 Usage Setting: Check whether to use selected device or not.

 Product Name: Displays name of the product. (After the registration, receive product information then
the Product name will appear.)

 Product Version: Displays version of the product. (After the registration, receive product information
then the Product name will appear.)

 Description: Insert description of the Loop.

Operating mode.

 Set to operating option about set to device. Depending on device, only applicable options can be
selected.

87
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD


 Select the matching operating option about set to the device.

 Anti-Passback: Set to Anti-passback to ‘use’ or ‘not in use’. In case of iTDC controller, depending on
door setting also available.

 Door Open Alarm Time: Set to the time for alarm. The time means from opening door to generating
alarm. (Default: 3 seconds)

 Voice Mode: Set to available controller (LX series) for voice output.

 Voice Mode Time Schedule: Set to time schedule that the voice output is available.

 Duress Alarm Mode: Set to Duress alarm mode to use.

 Duress Alarm Number: Select 2digits number to use duress alarm mode. For keypad reader, if you input
duress alarm number, access is granted. After granted access, duress alarm output is generated then it
sends to operating program.

 Alarm to use: Set to alarm to use.

 Using Alarm INPUT: using of the independence iTDC. Set to this function when processes by using of
input button for alarm setting function. Input button is using in input 7.

 Alarm code: If using of alarm setting or cancellation, set to 2digits code for alarm setting. Code only can
be number and 00 code is not able to use. Also the code likes alarm setting code or cancellation code
is not able to use as same code, so different code is required to use.

 Alarm cancellation code: If using of alarm setting or cancellation, set to 2digits alarm cancellation code.
Code only can be the number and the code ‘00’ is not able to use. Also the code likes alarm setting
code or cancellation code is not able to use as same code, so different code is required to use.

 2 men operation mode to use: Set to 2 men operation mode to use.

88
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

Option Setting Device Function


 LCD display: Set to option whether authentication status is displayed or card number is displayed.

 Output Operation Time Unit (sec): Select the operating time for output point of contact as 1 second or
0.1 second of interval.

 To use keypad: Set to use device contained keypad.

 Wiegand Output: If you set to this function, separate authentication success number is generating by
WIEGAND output when granted access.

 Duplicate event checking: Set to perception function for duplication event.

 User name display: Set to the function that displays name of person who granted access.

 Monitor turn off time : Set up monitor turn off time (MAC device)

 Voice description : Select whether to use vioce description(MAC device)

Biometric Property

89
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD


 Reader Mode: It is used when biometric reader is used.

Identification Process Description

When the card is presented to biometric reader, recorded card number


Identified by only Card is transferred to the controller by WIEGAND communication and the
controller grants access only when card number is registered.

Use card and fingerprint to grant access.

When the card is presented to the biometric reader, if the scanner


Identified by
doesn’t turn red, it means the card holder doesn’t register fingerprint
Card + Fingerprint When the fingerprint identification is successful, recorded card number
is transferred to the controller by WIEGAND communication and the
controller grants access only when card number registered.

Identified by
Use card, fingerprint and password to grant access.
Card + Fingerprint + Password

 Fingerprint registration Mode: You can set fingerprint registration mode. You can register same
fingerprint twice or register one fingerprint and another fingerprint once again.

Fingerprint
Description
registration Mode

One Finger Two Register same finger twice for two templates. If you use this mode performance
Templates of fingerprint identification can be higher.

90
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

Register one finger and another finger once again for two templates. This mode
If you use this mode performance of fingerprint identification can be lower. But
Two Finger Two this mode is useful when one fingerprint is damaged because you can use
Templates another finger.
Caution: You beware to put your finger in Two Finger Two Templates mode. If
you put your same finger on reader then error will be occurred.

 Remaining fingerprint use : Select remaining fingerprint correction setting. Generally it called “Adaptive”
function, and average of fingerprint authentication is increased by the function, but speed for
processing it may be decreased. The function also corrects dry or wet fingerprint.If you set this function,
red light is lit on fingerprint scanner when you identify your fingerprint. If you wish to increase the
speed of processing authentication, don’t use this function. If you don’t use this function, red light on
fingerprint scanner is turned off.

 Identification byonly fingerprint: Select between‘Use’ or ‘Not in use’

 Output Type: Select between ‘Normal’ or ‘Extended’

Events Priority Setting

 Set priority by moving an event in Event List into rightward Event Priority List (MAC device)

Setting for type of event storage

91
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Set up save type by event(MAC device)

Lift options

 Whether to enable keypad : Decide whether to use the keypad.

 Card type : Select the type of the card.

 Function Description

Search

 Click ‘Combo’ next to ‘Quick find’ on top of the window, registered Device information will display.
Insert data to be searched, then information will display on the screen.

 Click ‘Arrow’( ) on Tool bar, then ‘Previous and Next’ Site Information will display.

92
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Click ‘Search’( ) on Tool bar, in case of Advanced Search is required. This case, go to Search screen of
Main screen.

Device Addition(New Registration)

 Click ‘New’( ) on tool bar.

 Information will initialize in all boxes.

 Fill out information in all boxes. Yellow boxes are requisite fields. You should fill out Yellow boxes.

 Go to ‘Device Type’, select Controller and Biometric Reader.

 In case of controller, basic setting, operation mode and controller option tabs are activated.

 In case of elevator, basic setting and lift option tabs are activated.

 In case of Biometric Reader, general information and biometric setting tabs will activate. Default value is
set for each Biometric device. Default value is for user convenience, it is also adjustable.

 Click ‘Save’( ) on tool bar.

Device Modification

 Click ‘Combo box’ next to ‘Quick find’ on top of the window, then Registered device’s information will
display. Click desired data, then information will display on the screen.

 Click ‘Arrow’( ) on Tool bar, then ‘Previous and Next’ Site Information will display.

 Click ‘Save’( ), after modify the desired item.

Device Deletion

 Click ‘Combo box’ next to ‘Quick find’ on top of the window, then Registered device’s information will
display. Click desired data, then information will display on the screen.

 Click ‘Arrow’( ) on Tool bar, then ‘Previous and Next’ Site Information will display.

 Click ‘Delete’( ) on Tool bar.

Transition

93
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Click ‘Send’( ), then information will be transmitted. (If you have changed data is transmitted and
saved.)

Auto transmission

 Clcik New( ) button of tool bar on the top of screen and input each items[check whether to use a

device] and then click click Save( ) button on the top of screen. Or select a registered device from

combo on the upper left of screen and click Save( ) button.

 Either “Successfully saved by whether to use the device and whether to activate. Do you want to transfer
it?”message appears directly or “Do you want to transfer after a message appears??” message appears
after “Do you want to restart the communication server?” message. In case of the former, click“YES”
button. In case of the latter, click “Ok” button and click“Yes” button when “Do you want to transfer it
after restarting communication server?” message appears.

94
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

4.4.2 Door Setting

Configure the point of contact of controller. Each controller is connected to reader. Hence in order to manage
controller, it is necessary to set controller information on software.

 Screen Description

General Information

 Click the ‘New’ ( ) button.

 All information in input space is initialized.

 Select the Site Name.

 Select the Loop Name. .

 Select the Device Name which controls the door. Select registered device.

 Depending on selected device, selectable door lists are displayed. In case of iTDC controller is able to
set to maximum of 4 doors, the others are only 1 door. Select door information to add or change in tab
list.

 Add name of door or change it.

 Select building-floor. Select building-floor to recognize location of door.

95
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Set to door operating time. The time means lock device of door is canceled.

 Select the Auto Lock Device Operating Time setting. It means set to time for cancellation of door lock.
Default is ‘not in use’.

 If you would like to use setting door in graphic map, select icon for using of graphic map. You can set
to graphic map on graphic map setting.

 Next is description of setting for the reader on door. Depending on door type of device, available to set
to entrance reader and exit reader.

 Select the Entrance Reader (reader1).

 Select the Entrance Reader to ‘use’ or ‘not in use’.

 Input the Reader Name.

 Select the Reader Type. In case of normal RF Card reader, select‘Proximity reader’ and the case of
contained keypad, select the ‘Proximity reader + Keypad’. If biometric recognition reader is connected to
entrance reader (iTDC, iCON100), select the ‘Biometric recognition reader’.

 To set what kind of biometric recognition reader is connected to entrance reader, select information
about biometric recognition reader.

 Select the ‘Reader operating mode’. If you authenticate by only the RF card, select the ‘RF Only’. Andif
you authenticate by RF card with password, select the ‘RF+Password’. If you authenticate by RF card
with biometric select the ‘RF+FINGERPRINT (Password)’ or the‘RF+PASSWORD+FINGERPRINT’.

 Select Time Schedule for Reader Operating Mode to ‘use’ or ‘not in use’. During using of reader
operating mode, if the mode in the time set to the schedule sector, reader operating mode is
automatically changed to ‘RF ONLY’. Set to Time Schedule for Reader Operating Mode.

 If there is exit reader of door, select exit reader (Reader 2) to ‘use’ or ‘not in use’. In case of 4 Doors
type of iTDC controller, you cannot select exit reader.

 Input the Reader Name.

 Select the Reader Type. In case of normal RF Card reader, select‘Proximity reader’ and the case of
contained keypad, select the ‘Proximity reader + Keypad’. If biometric recognition reader is connected to
entrance reader (iTDC, iCON100), select the ‘Biometric recognition reader’.

 To set what kind of biometric recognition reader is connected to entrance reader, select information
about biometric recognition reader.

 Select the ‘Reader operating mode’. If you authenticate by only the RF card, select the ‘RF Only’. Andif
you authenticate by RF card with password, select the ‘RF+Password’. If you authenticate by RF card
with biometric, select the ‘RF+FINGERPRINT (Password)’ or the‘RF+PASSWORD+FINGERPRINT’.

96
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Select the Time Schedule for Reader Operating Mode to ‘use’ or ‘not in use’. During using of reader
operating mode, if the mode in the time set to the schedule sector, reader operating mode is
automatically changed to ‘RF ONLY’. Set to Time Schedule for Reader Operating Mode.

 Set to reader operating mode time schedule.

 If select the Time Schedule for Reader Operating Mode to ‘use’ or ‘not in use’, set to time schedule for
reader operating mode.

 In case of using of iTDC controller, depending on door type, you can add door 2, 3 and 4. Set to
connected door 2, 3 and 4 as before.

 Click the ‘Save’ ( ) button to save setting information.

 Click the ‘Send’ ( ) button to send inputted door information. (In case of the sending function, it
operates when communication server works as normal and the communication server is communicating
with device. When the communication has problem, error message is generated. If the error message
comes up, check the communication server or the communication of controller.

 Function Description

Search

 Click ‘Combo’ next to ‘Quick find’ on top of the window, Door information will display. Insert data to be
searched, then information will display on the screen.

 Click ‘Arrow’( ) on Tool bar, then ‘Previous and Next’ Site Information will display.

 Click ‘Search’( ) on Tool bar, in case of Advanced Search is required. This case, go to Search screen of
Main screen.

Door Addition(New Registration)

 Click ‘New’( ) on tool bar.

 Information will initialize in all boxes.

97
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Fill out information in all boxes. Yellow boxes are requisite fields. You should fill out Yellow boxes.

 Click ‘Save’( ) on tool bar.

Door Modification

 Click ‘Combo’ next to ‘Quick find’ on top of the window, Door information will display. Insert data to be
searched, then information will display on the screen.

 Click ‘Arrow’( ) on Tool bar, then ‘Previous and Next’ Site Information will display.

 Click ‘Save’( ), after modify the desired item.

Door Deletion

 Click ‘Combo’ next to ‘Quick find’ on top of the window, Door information will display. Insert data to be
searched, then information will display on the screen.

 Click ‘Arrow’( ) on Tool bar, then ‘Previous and Next’ Site Information will display.

 Click ‘Delete’( ) on Tool bar.

Door Setting Send

 Transmit Door Setting information of device.

 Click ‘Transmit’( ) then, Door setting information will be transmitted. (If you have changed data is
transmitted and saved.)

Auto transmission of door setting.

 Transmit door setting information of a device to the device.

 Click New( ) button of tool bar on the top of screen and input each items and then click Save( )
button of tool bar on the top of screen. Or Select registered door information from combo on the

upper left of screen and click Save( ) button.

 “Successfully saved. Do you want to transfer it??”message appears.

 Once you click“Yes”, inputted reader information is transmitted.

98
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

4.5 Reader/Input/OutputPoint Setting

4.5.1 Reader Point Setting

Set to event is generating as specified output signal from reader. If you wish to use as basic setting, you don’t have
to add or change and delete.Someinformation about Reader operating and mutual operating relation of output signal,
operating time, input point of contact is able to change or send.

 Screen description

Basic information

Depending on number of controller and reader, input information becomes default value. So you don’t need
to input or delete .To change reader point of contact, use change function then send it.

 Select the Site Name.

 Select the Loop Name.

 Select the Device Name.

 On input select screen, reader operating list is displayed. Select reader operating information to change.

 Select output you wish to change and then change the time.

 Click the ‘Save’ ( ) button to save setting information.

99
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Function description

Searching

 If select the device then registered reader point of contact information is displayed.

 If detail searching is required, click the ‘Search’ ( ) button. In this case.

Changing reader point of contact information

 If double click reader point of contact, the matching information is displayed.

 Click the ‘Save’ ( ) button.

Sending reader point of contact information.

 Setting value about reader point of contact of device is sent.

 Check ‘reader setting’ then click the ‘Sending’( ) button then inputted reader point of contact
information is sent. (If you have changed data is transmitted and saved.)

Auto transmission of reader point information.

 Transmit setting values of reader point of a device to the device.

 Once you double click reader point from Reader Point List, the information is displayed.

 Click Save( ) button of tool bar on the top of screen.

 “Successfully saved. Do you want to transfer it?” message appears.

 Once you click “Yes”, inputted reader point information is transmitted.

100
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

4.5.2 Input PointSetting

Inputsetting is to set mutual act, which means a signal toward the specific output when an input signal is initiated.
Input point is automatically created from 1 to n for each controller. Hence, it is not required to add or delete points.
This page explains method of modification and transmitting information about Mutual act of input/output signal,
duration, and input point.

 Screen Description

General Information

General information of input point is set according to controller, hence delete is not required. In case user
willing to modify input point setting, use modification function then transmit to controller.

 Site Name: Select the Site Name of registered reader.

 Loop Name: Select the Loop Name of registered reader.

 Device Name: Select the Device Name of registered reader.

 InputName: Insert Name of the Input Point.

 InputType: Select Input Point type, Door contact, Exit button, Sensor, Fire sensor or Normal input. (But
for iTDC, change of input contact type is restricted depending on number of doors. Refer to below
chart)

101
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

Number of
Restricted input contact adress
doors

Fixed 1,2 (Change is restricted regardless to door


numbers)

2 3, 4

3 8, 9, 10, 11

4 3, 4, 8, 9, 10, 11

 Signal Type: Select NO or NC.

 Time schedule: Select if Time schedule will be used.

Time schedule of Input Point

In setting time schedule setting, only the case belongs to set to time schedule, output signal is generated.

If sensor attached on specified input point of contact, the sensor always generates input events even daytime
or night. In this case, other event process becomes slow by generating many events. Andlots of useless sensor
perception events are generated.

In this case, if set to time schedule from Am 09:00 to Pm 18:00 on input point of contact, sensor signal doesn’t
generate events in the setting time. So even if sensor perceives in the time from Am 09:00 to Pm 18:00, input
signal is not operated.

 Building-Floor: Select Building-Floor in order to locate the Door.

 Use Graphic Map: Select Map if user want to use it for monitoring.

 Icon: Standard Icon is provided, User can customize icon.

 Description: Insert description of Input point.

Output Point Operating time Setting

Configure activation time and set mutual initiation between input point and output signal.

102
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Operating time setting for Output point of contact: Setoutput point time for selected input point.

 Function Description

Search

 Information of Input point will display when user select a device.

 Click ‘Search’( ) on Tool bar, in case of Advanced Search is required. This case, go to Search screen of
Main screen.

Input information Modification

 Double click input point from input list to display information.

 Click ‘Save’( ) on tool bar.

Input information Send

103
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Transmit set value of input point of device.

 Mark ‘InputSetting’ from Setting Type, and click ‘Send’( ) on tool bar then input point information will
transmit. (If you have changed data is transmitted and saved)

Auto transmission of input information.

 Transmit setting values of input point of a device to the device.

 Once you double click input point from Input List, the information is displayed.

 Click Save( ) button of tool bar on the top of screen.

 “Successfully saved. Do you want to transfer it?” message appears.

 Once you click “Yes”, inputted reader point information is transmitted.

104
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

4.5.3 Output PointSetting

Output points are automatically created from 1 to n for each controller. Hence, it is not required to add or delete
points. Information of output point can be modified and transmitted.

 Screen Description

OutputSetting

 Site Name: Select the Site Name of registered reader.

 Loop Name: Select the Loop Name of registered reader.

 Device Name: Select the Device Name of registered reader.

 Output Name: Insert Name of the Output Point.

 Output Type: Select output Point type according to its use from following, Door lock, Door alarm,
Normal Relay. Select Door lock, if the selected door will be equipped with lock.

 Time schedule: Select if Time schedule will be used.

Time schedule of Output point

105
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

In setting time schedule, only the case belongs to set to time schedule, output signal is generated.

If door lock is connected to special output, matching output is maintain in lock or unlock depending on
output status. It can be setting as this example, in working time, automatically unlocks the lock then
access becomes easy for employees. After working time to before attendance, keeps the lock then
registered card is requires to authenticate.

Lock is automatically unlocked in the set to time. Out of the time is keeping in lock status.

 Operation Mode: In case of time schedule is applied, at the set time Lock automatically become
unlocked. Or manually unlock the lock, in this case card verification is required to unlock. In order to
use this mode, select Manual (Time+ID). This function is only active when output type is set as Door
lock. (X)

 Building-Floor: Select Building-Floor in order to locate the Door.

 Use Graphic Map: Select Map if user want to use it for monitoring.

 Icon: Standard Icon is provided, User can customize icon.

 Description: Insert description of Output point.

 Function Description

Search

 Select device, then Output point will be displayed.

 Click ‘Search’( ) on Tool bar, in case of Advanced Search is required. This case, go to Search screen of
Main screen.

Output information Modification

 Double click output point from output list to display information.

106
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Click ‘Save’( ) on tool bar.

Output information Send

 Transmit set value of output point of device.

 Mark ‘OutputSetting’ from Setting Type, and click ‘Send’( ) on tool bar then output point information
will transmit. (If you have changed data is transmitted and saved.)

 Setting File

Auto transmission of output information.

 Transmit setting values of output point of a device to the device.

 Once you double click output point from Output List, the information is displayed.

 Click Save( ) button of tool bar on the top of screen.

 “Successfully saved. Do you want to transfer it?” message appears.

 Once you click “Yes”, inputted reader point information is transmitted.

107
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

5. SYSTEM MANAGEMENT

5.1 Device Management

5.1.1 Initialize Device

This menu enable user to Initialize, configure, file transmit/receive Controller and Biometric device. Update Firmware.

 Screen Description

Controller

Initialize information of controller.

 Device Selection (Tab: Controller/Biometric): Select Controller and Biometric device.

 Device List: Select desired device from the list.

 Initialization Type: Select initialization type.(Unable to select more than one)

Initialization Type Description

Initialize System Initialize all information of controller and set to default value. Re-setting is required.

Initialize ID information saved on controller. Access permit is limited through


Initialize ID corresponding controller, since ID initialization. Transmitting User information is
required.

Initialize Event Initialize Event information saved on controller. Event information may be lost if

108
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

and Alarm entire event information is not transmitted onto Host PC. Please be cautious,
Information cannot be restored once it is initialized.

Initialize Initialize time schedule and Holiday information saved on controller. Time schedule
Timeshcedule and and Holiday information may not apply properly once it is initialized. Re-setting is
Holiday required.

System setting
Initializes system information except card ID. (Only LX is available)
value initialization

Biometric Device

Initialize information of Biometric device.

 Device Selection (Tab: Controller/Biometric): Select Controller and Biometric device.

 Device List: Select desired device from the List.

 Initialization Type: Select initialization type.(Unable to select more than one)

Initialize Type Description

Initialize all information of controller and set to default value. Re-setting is


Initialize System
required.

Initialize ID information and Fingerprint data saved on Biometric device.


Initialize ID and Fingerprint
Transmitting User information is required.

 Function Description

Controller/Biometrics device

109
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Device Initialization(Commonly applied to Controller, Biometric device)

 Select device from the list.

 Select Initialization type. Only individual selection is available.

 Click ‘Transmit’( ) from tool bar.

 Check whether information transmitted properly or not. If not, re-transmit or check communication
status.

110
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

5.1.2 Device Time Setting

Set up the Time of Controller and Biometric device.

 Screen Description

Controller

Set up the Time of Controller.

 Device List: Select desired device from the List.(Able to select more than one)

 Date and Time: Select desired Date and Time.

 Date: Select desired Date.

 Day of week: Day will be set Corresponding to date.(Able to modify manually)

 Time: PC time will be sync.

 Select All: Able to select all devices at once.

 Remove All: Able to cancel all devices at once.

Biometric device

Set up the Time of Biometric device.

111
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Device Selection (Tab): Select Controller and Biometric device.

 Device List: Select desired device from the List.(Able to select more than one)

 Date and Time: Select desired Date and Time.

 Date: Select desired Date.

 Day of week: Day will be set Corresponding to date.(Able to modify manually)

 Time: PC time will be sync.

 Select All: Able to select all devices at once.

 Remove All: Able to cancel all devices at once.

Time Synchronization Setting

This page allow user to select automatic synchronization the time information of Controller and Biometric

device.

 Automatic Synchronization Time and Set whether use or not: Automatically synchronize time
information if user mark ‘use’.

 Synchronization Time: Insert Time.

 ‘Whether use or not’: Automatically synchronize time information if user mark ‘use’.

 Function Description

Controller/Biometric device

 Time setting(Apply on both Controller and Biometric device)

 Select the device, and insert Date and Time, click ‘Transmit’( ) to send Time information of PC
time.

 Auto interval setting(Apply on both Controller and Biometric device)

 At every set interval, synchronize the time of device with PC.

112
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Mark the tick box, in order to apply auto interval and click ‘Save’( ). (In case of cancel the function,
unmark the tick box and save.)

 In order to utilize auto interval function, IDTECKSTANDARD program needs to be operating.

113
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

5.1.3 Batch Transmit by Device

Transmit information to Controller and Biometric device.

 Screen Description

Controller

This screen explains BatchSend of those information of PC to Controller.

 Device Selection (Tab): Select Controller, Biometric device and User.

 Device List: Select desired device from the List.

 Select Information: Select list to be transmitted.(Able to select more than one)

 Select All: Able to select all controller or system list at once.

 Remove All: Able to cancel all controller or system list at once.

Biometric device

This page explainsBatchSend of those information of PC to Biometric device.

114
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Device Selection (Tab): Select Controller, Biometric device and User.

 Device List: Select desired device from the List.

 Select Information: Select list to be transmitted.(Able to select more than one)

 Select All: Able to select all controller or system list at once.

 Remove All: Able to cancel all controller or system list at once.

 Function Description

Controller

 System Information Transmission

 Select desired device from list. Select desired item from system information list. (Able to select more
than one.)

 Click ‘Send’( ), then information will be transmitted to selected device.

 If system setting information is transmitted, selected device will re-boot.

Biometric device

 System Information Transmission

 Select desired device from list. Select desired item from system information list. (Able to select more
than one.)

 Click ‘Send’( ), then information will be transmitted to selected device.

115
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

5.1.4 Card Holder Batch Transmission by Device

This page explains transmitting User information to controller and biometric device. Also creating and transmitting
Access card to controller and biometric device.

 Screen Description

Card Holder Batch Transmission

This screen explains BatchSend of those user information of PC to Controller and Biometric device.

 Device List: Select desired device from list.

 Selection: Select method of transmitting user information.

 Transmit searched user information to the selected device. Below is the search condition.

 Company: Select company

 Department: Insert department name.

 Employee ID: Insert employee ID.

 Name: Insert user name.

 Card number: Insert card number.

 Send cardholder list by Access Group to the selected device: Selected device sends batch passers
belong to access group to applicable device.

 Card Holder List: Transmit the selected user within the searched user to the device.

 [If the Send Card Holders that are searched on database selection will apply].

Create Sequence Card No. and Transmission

This page explains process of creating card number as much as range and transmitting to database.

116
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Device List:Select desired device from list.

 Create Condition: Select conditions in order to create card numbers.

 Company: Select company, which will be included in card number.

 Department: Select department, which will be included in card number.

 Access Group: Select access group, which will be included in card number.

 Lift group : Select a lift group, which will be included in card number.

 Function Description

Card Holder Batch Transmission

 Searched user information Send

 Click ‘Send’( ), then searched card holder information displaying on grid will be transmitted to
selected device.

 Send cardholders access to the selected device

 Click the ‘Send’( ) button then the selected device is sending batch passer which belongs to the
applicable passer group to the applicable device.

Create Sequence Card No. and Transmission

 Transmit card number

 When ‘Send’( ) button is clicked, range of inserted card numbers will be created in database and
those created information will be transmitted to selected device.

 If inserted range of card number already exists, it is unable to create information.

117
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

5.1.5 Information Receive from Device

This screen display received information of Controller and Biometric device.

 Screen Description

Controller

This screen displays received information of Controller.

 Device List: Select desired controller from the list.

 ReceiveStatus: Displays information of selected controller.

 Product Version: Displays version of the device.

 Product Name: Displays name of the device.

 Registered number: Displays number of user registered on device.

Biometric device

This screen displays received information of Controller.

118
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Device List: Select desired biometric device from the list.(Able to select more than one)

 Receive Status: Displays information of selected device.

 Product Version: Displays version of the device.

 Product Name: Displays name of the device.

 Registered number: Displays number of user registered on device.

 Function Description

Controller

 Receive Device information

 Click ‘Receive’( ) then start receiving information of selected device, information includes;
reception status, version, name, and number of user. Display those information on screen.

Biometric device

 Receive Device information

 Click ‘Receive’( ) then start receiving information of selected device, information includes;
reception status, version, name, and number of user. Display those information on screen.

119
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

5.1.6 Firmware Upgrade

You can upgrade the firmware (only Mac Device).

 Screen Description

Controller

Transfer the new firmware file to the MAC device to the upgrade.

 Select All : Select all the devices you want to upgrade the firmware.

 Remove All : Uncheck the whole the selected device.

 Search : Select the firmware file that you want to search updates.

120
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

5.2 Master Card Setting

5.2.1 Master Card Setting

Register, modify or delete the Master card and transmit data. This function can be operated on biometric device. One
master card and one fingerprint can be registered on Biometric device. This stage is to manage related information.
This function is provided by fingerprint readers like FGR006, FGR006SR, FINGER006 and FINGER006SR.

 Screen Description

Mastercard Management

 Company: Select the company.

 Mastercard Name: Insert name of the mastercard.

 Card number: Insert the card number or PIN number (Personal identification number).

 Duplication Check: Check whether card number or PIN number (Personal Identification number) is
duplicated or not.

 Password: Insert the password.

 Description: Insert any description on mastercard.

121
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Use Biometric Information: Select whether to use bio-information or not.

 Fingerprint management using Hamster– Fingerprint registration: Utilize Hamster to operate fingerprint
verification.

Biometric device list

 Function Description

Master Card Management

 Register Mastercard

 Insert following information; [Company], [Mastercard Name], [Card number], [Password],


[Description].

 Click ‘Fingerprint registration’ and start registration as below.

122
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Select the number of fingerprint template ( 5 templates to the maximum for MAC, XO device)

 When trasmitted with more than two templates registered, fingerprints registered first and second
will be used

 Click the button above the finger desired to be scanned

 Register the fingerprint when fingerprint registration pop-up is dispalyed and the light of Hamster
is on. Once fingerprint is registered, apply button will be activated so you can register your
fingerprint.

 Windows above will appear when registering fingerprint by mean of ‘Hamster’’.

 Message: Notification for fingerprint registration.

 Picture box: Screened fingerprint is displayed.

 Quality: Display the quality of registered fingerprint.

 Application: Apply fingerprint data.

 Fingerprint is registered for twice and above images are examples. Last image is shown when quality
is low and user has to re-do it. Quality is required to be over Level 3. Entire registration start over if
user fail to register more than 3 times.

 Click ‘Save’( ), and complete mastercard registration process.

 Master Card Modification

 Go to top-left side of screen and select mastercard which requires modification.

123
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Select directly from combo-box or user can select by clicking ‘Previous’( ) or ‘Next’( ).

 Modify the contents of each items and click ‘Save’( ).

 Delete Master Card

 Go to top-left side of screen and select mastercard which required to be deleted.

 Select directly from combo-box or user can select by clicking ‘Previous’( ) or ‘Next’( ).

 Click ‘Delete’( ) from tool bar.

 MAC 장치의 경우 마스터카드 삭제시 장치에서도 마스터카드를 삭제합니다.

 Search Master Card

 Go to ‘Main Screen’ and go to ‘Operation Management’ tab and click ‘Search Master Card’ or go to

registration and click ‘Search’( ), then image below will appear.


 Transmit matercard

 Select directly from combo-box or user can select by clicking ‘Previous’( ) or ‘Next’( ).

 Click ‘Send’( ).(If you have changed data is transmitted and saved.)

 Individual Send: Transmit selected data to device so configured function can be operated on device.

 User can select the device and transmit card information to biometric device.

124
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

6. OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT

6.1 Basic Setting

6.1.1 Company Setting

Insert companies those uses the system.

 Screen Description

Company Setting

 Company Name: Insert name of the company.

 Address: Insert address of the company.

 Zip code: Insert zip code of the company.

 Phone Number: Insert Phone Number of the company.

 Fax number: Insert fax number of the company.

 E-mail: Insert e-mail of the company.

 Description: Insert description of the company.

 Open: Appoint image file of company logo.(Image size 100 X 32)

 Clear: Delete image file of company logo.

 Function Description

Company Registration

125
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Register Company

 Click ‘New’ then window changes into insert mode.

 Insert Company name.(Required field)

 Insert each field and click ‘Save’( ).

 Modify Company

 Select the company to modify from company list.

 Select directly from combo-box or user can select by clicking ‘Previous’( ) or ‘Next’( ).

 Modify each field and click ‘Save’( ).

 Delete Company

 Select the company to delete from company list.

 Select directly from combo-box or user can select by clicking ‘Previous’( ) or ‘Next’( ).

 Click ‘Delete’( ).

 Search Company

 Go to Main screen and Operation management Tab and click ‘Search’. Or go to registration screen

and click ‘Search’( ), then screen below will appear.

 Set company name as search condition.

 ‘Select’ column enables to select the company. Select desired company to delete and click

‘Delete’( ), then selected companies will be deleted. Also click ‘Modify’( ) then, company
information displays on screen and now able to modify.

126
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

6.1.2 Department Setting

Register department of company.

 Screen Description

Department Setting

 Department : Insert name of the department.

 Description: Insert additional information of the department.

 Function Description

Department registration

 Register department

 Click ‘New’ then window changes into insert mode.

 Insert Department name.(Required field)

 Insert each field and click ‘Save’( ).

 Modify department

 Select the department to modify from department list.

 Select directly from combo-box or user can select by clicking ‘Previous’( ) or ‘Next’( ).

 Modify each field and click ‘Save’( ).

 Delete department

 Select the department to delete from department list.

 Select directly from combo-box or user can select by clicking ‘Previous’( ) or ‘Next’( ).

 Click ‘Delete’( ).

127
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Search department

 Go to Main screen and Operation management Tab and click ‘Department Search’. Or go to

registration screen and click ‘Search’( ), then screen below will appear.

128
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

6.1.3 Title Setting

Register title.

 Screen Description

Title Setting

 Title : Insert name of the title.

 Description: Insert additional description of the title.

 Function Description

Title registration

 Register title

 Click ‘New’ then window changes into insert mode.

 Insert title name.(Required field)

 Insert each field and click ‘Save’( ).

 Modify title

 Select the title to modify from title list.

 Select directly from combo-box or user can select by clicking ‘Previous’( ) or ‘Next’( ).

 Modify each field and click ‘Save’( ).

 Delete title

 Select the title to delete from title list.

 Select directly from combo-box or user can select by clicking ‘Previous’( ) or ‘Next’( ).

 Click ‘Delete’( ).

129
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Search title

 Go to Main screen and Operation management Tab and click ‘Title Search’. Or go to registration

screen and click ‘Search’( ), then screen below will appear.

130
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

6.1.4 Position Registration

Register the position.

 Screen Description

Register Position

 Position Name: Insert name of the position.

 Description: Insert additional description of the position.

 Function Description

Position Registration

 Register Position

 Click ‘New’ then window changes into insert mode.

 Insert position name.(Required field)

 Insert each field and click ‘Save’( ).

 Modify Position

 Select the position to modify from position list.

 Select directly from combo-box or user can select by clicking ‘Previous’( ) or ‘Next’( ).

 Modify each field and click ‘Save’( ).

 Delete position

 Select the position to delete from position list.

 Select directly from combo-box or user can select by clicking ‘Previous’( ) or ‘Next’( ).

 Click ‘Delete’( ).

131
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Search position

 Go to Main screen and Operation management Tab and click ‘Position Search’. Or go to registration

screen and click ‘Search’( ), then screen below will appear.

132
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

6.1.5 Company-Department Setting

Register departments on company. This stage is available after completing the ‘Department Registration’.

 Screen Description

Company-Department Setting

 Department List: List of departments.

 Company-Department List: Department list registered on company.

 Function Description

Company-Department Setting

 Company-Department registration

 Select desired department from the list.

 Move the selected department to ‘Company-Department list’ by clicking ‘Move’ , or drag


and drop otherwise double click.

 Click ‘Save’( ) and complete Company-Department setting.

 Modify Company-Department

 Move department to be modified.

 Click ‘Save’( ) and complete Company-Department setting.

133
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

6.1.6 Company-Title Setting

Register title on company. This stage is available after completing the ‘Title Registration’.

 Screen Description

Company-Title Setting

 Title List: List of the duties.

 Company-Title List: Title list registered on company.

 Function Description

Company-Title Setting

 Company-Title registration

 Select desired title from the list.

 Move the selected title to ‘Company-Title list’ by clicking ‘Move’ , or drag and drop
otherwise double click.

 Click ‘Save’( ) and complete Company-Titlesetting.

 Modify Company-Title

 Move title to be modified.

 Click ‘Save’( ) and complete Company-Titlesetting.

134
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

6.1.7 Company-Position Setting

Register position on company. This stage is available after completing the ‘Position Registration’.

 Screen Description

Company-Position Setting

 Position List: List of the positions.

 Company-Position List: Position list registered on company.

 Function Description

Company-Position Setting

 Company-Position registration

 Select desired Position from the list.

 Move the selected Position to ‘Company-Position list’ by clicking ‘Move’ , or drag and drop
otherwise double click.

 Click ‘Save’( ) and complete Company-Position setting.

 Modify Company-Position

 Move Position to be modified.

 Click ‘Save’( ) and complete Company-Position setting.

135
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

6.1.8 Access Type Setting

This function used to display access type of the user.

 Screen Description

Access Type Setting

 Access Type Name: Insert name of the Access Type.

 Description: Insert description of the Access Type.

 Function Description

Access Type Registration

 Register Access Type

 Click ‘New’ then window changes into insert mode.

 Insert Access Type name. (Required field). Insert each field and click ‘Save’( ).

 Modify Access Type

 Select the Access Type to modify from Access Type list.

 Select directly from combo-box or user can select by clicking ‘Previous’( ) or ‘Next’( ).

 Modify each field and click ‘Save’( ).

 Delete Access Type

 Select the Access Type to delete from Access Type list.

 Select directly from combo-box or user can select by clicking ‘Previous’( ) or ‘Next’( ).

 Click ‘Delete’( ).

 Search Access Type

136
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Go to Main screen and Operation management Tab and click ‘Search’. Or go to registration screen

and click ‘Search’( ), then screen below will appear.

 Set Access Type name as search condition.

 ‘Select’columnenables to select the Access Type. Select desired Access Type to delete and click

‘Delete’( ), then selected companies will be deleted. Also click ‘Modify’( ) then, Access Type
information displays on screen and now able to modify.

137
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

6.2 Fire Information Grouping

6.2.1 Fire Group Setting

Configure input point of controller to be Fire signal. Configure emergencyopeningdoor for specific Fire signal. This
function is available when specific fire signal initiates, selected door will be opened. If unregistered fire signal initiates,
every door connected to the system will be opened.

 Screen Description

Fire Group Setting

In order to configure fire group, set fire signal of input points.

 Fire group name: Insert name of the fire group.

 Fire Input: Select desired fire contact point.

 Description: Insert brief description of the fire group.

 Door List: List of registered doors(Support Drag & Drop)

 Fire group door list: Display doors mapped to corresponding fire group.(Support Drag & Drop)

 Function Description

Search

138
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Click ‘Combo box’ next to ‘Quick find’ on top of the window, then Fire Group information will display.
Click desired data, then information will display on the screen.

 Click ‘Arrow’( ) on Tool bar, then ‘Previous and Next’ Fire group Information will display.

 Click ‘Search’( ) on Tool bar, in case of Advanced Search is required. This case, go to Search screen of
Main screen.

Add Fire Group(New Registration)

 Click ‘New’( ) on tool bar.

 Information will initialize in all boxes.

 Fill out information in all boxes. Yellow boxes are requisite fields. You should fill out Yellow boxes.

 Click ‘Save’( ) on tool bar.

Fire Group Modification

 Click ‘Combo box’ next to ‘Quick find’ on top of the window, then Registered Fire Group information
will display. Click desired data, then information will display on the screen.

 Click ‘Arrow’( ) on Tool bar, then ‘Previous and Next’ Fire Group Information will display.

 Click ‘Save’( ), after modify desired item.

Fire Group Deletion

 Click ‘Combo box’ next to ‘Quick find’ on top of the window, then Fire Group information will display.
Click desired data, then information will display on the screen.

 Click ‘Arrow’( ) on Tool bar, then ‘Previous and Next’ Fire Group Information will display.

 Click ‘Delete’( ) on Tool bar.

139
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

6.3 Graphic Map Setting

6.3.1 Graphic map Setting

Register or modify graphic map by building or floors.

 Screen Description

Graphic map setting

 Graphic map Name: Name of the graphic name.

 Graphic map location: Indicates building-floor which the graphic map represents.

 Building-Floor is displayed when a device allocated.

 Zone is activated when there’s no graphic map allocated on the building.

 Graphic map Image: Open graphic map image and locate the device.

Graphic Map Setting

Form a graphic map by indicating the devices on image.

140
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Graphic map viewer: General graphic map and registered device is illustrated.

 Device List

 When User and Administrator select a specific company, device of corresponding building-floor (or
all) will appear. When Administratorselects all company, entire device of corresponding building-
floor (or all) will appear.

 Function Description

Graphic map setting

 Save Graphic map

 Insert name of the graphic map.

 Insert building-floor which the graphic map is allocated.

 Select graphic map image and locate the devices onto the image.

 Click ‘Save’( ).

 Delete Graphic map

 Select the graphic map from the list.

 Click ‘Delete’( ).

 Search Graphic map

 Go to ‘Main Screen’ and go to ‘Operation Management’ tab and click ‘Search Graphic map’ or go to

registration and click ‘Search’( ), then image below will appear.

 Select building-floor. Or search by graphic map name.

 Modify search result

+ Double click search result then window appears which allow modifying the field.

141
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

+ Mark items, click ‘Modify’( ) then window appears which allow to modify those selected
items.

 Delete search result

+ Mark items, click ‘Delete’( ) then those selected items will be deleted.

Graphic map advanced setting

 Graphic map advanced setting

 Double click the device then the device will appear on top-left side of screen.

 Locate the selected device on graphic map. Take same procedure to locate Door, Input or Output
device.

 Click ‘Save’( ).

142
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

6.4 Mustering Management

6.4.1 Area Setting

Register, modify or delet Area

 Area setting is to figure out the information of people who are in the corresponding area after fire
event. [AREA] has to be configured by users and people who are in the corresponding area have to get
access from enterance reader. Also, the enterance door in configured AREA has to be installed IN/OUT
reader.

 Screen Description

Area Setting

 Area name: Enter area name. (Mandatory)

 Desctiprion: Enter information about the area

 Door list : Displays list of doors not registered at registered area. To register at the area, you must set
up entrance reader and exit reader at door setting.

 Registered door list : Displays registered doors or doors that you want to register in the area. Move into
registered door list from registrable door list for registration. (Mandatory)

 Function Description

Area registration

 Registering area

143
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Enter [Area name] and description.

 Select a door in [Door list] that is in the area you want.

 Drag and drop into [Registered Door list]).

 Click save ( ) button to complete area registration.

 Area modification

 Select one of registered areas that you wish to modify in left top combo box.

 You can select directly or by ( )( ) button.

 Click save ( ) button after modification.

 Area deletion

 Select one of registered areas that you wish to delete in left top combo box.

 You can select directly or by ( )( ) button.

 Click delete ( ) button in top tool bar.

 Area search

 Click operation management tap in left menu at main screen or click search( ) button in top tool
bar at registration screen will show screen like below.

144
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

6.4.2 Confirm card has left the area

When access approval event occurs at the entrance reader of the area, that area is treated as occupied with
applicable user. To make user being occupied in the area leave, generate access approval event at the exit reader or
process force exit in [Area exit process].

 Screen Description

Confirm card has left the area

 Search Condition

 Area Name : Select the area.

 Name : Enter name of the employee.

 Card Number : Enter card number. (Only numbers above 3 digits and below 10 digits are possible.)

 Door : Select a door.

 List of Area Out : Displays list of users in the area.

 Search: occupied user list in each area will show by clicking search button after entering information in
search options.

 Function Description

Confirm card has left the area

 Search

145
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Select Area Name.

 Enter name of the employee.

 Enter card number.

 Select a door.

 Click search button after entering information in search options.

 Exit process

 Select a user you want to treat him left the area in search result of [List of Area Out] and click leave

button < >.

146
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

7. ACCESS CONTROL MANAGEMENT

7.1 Managing time schedule

7.1.1 Holiday Setting

Register holidays. Capacity of holiday is 10 codes and 32~100 holidays can be registered by a holiday code.

 Screen Description

Holiday Setting

 Holiday management name: Insert holiday management names(Compulsory field to Insert)

 Holiday management code: There are 10 holiday management codes.

 Description: Insert description of holiday information

 ( ) button: Mark as Next Month

 ( ) button: Mark as a Previous Month

 User can type in‘Year-Month’ directly to display the respective ‘Year-Month’

147
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

Registering holidays

Register holidays that belong to holiday management

 Holiday names: Insert names of holidays

 Description: Insertdescription of holidays.

 Function Description

Accomplishing holidays

 Save holiday management

 Mode will change to ‘input mode’ when new( ) button on upper tool bar is clicked

 Select holiday management code(Compulsory to input), input holiday management name,


InsertDescription and double click the holiday dates that needs to be registered. Holiday
management screen display will then appear. Insert holiday name wand Description and Click save
button. The holiday of the respective date will then be added on the lower right hand corner. Do

148
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

the same process to register holidays (Maximum of 100holidays (iTDC, LX) and Maximum of 32
holidays (other controllers) can be registered per 1 holiday management code). Everything will be

saved when ‘save’ button( ) on tool bar is clicked,

 Modify holiday management

 Among the holiday managements on the upper left hand corner Combo, Select holiday
management that needs to be edited

 It can be chosen directly from Combo box or chosen with ‘previous( )’ or ‘next’( ) button

 Edit contents per fields and holidays can be added, deleted or edited for the holiday management
code. In case of editing or deleting holidays that belong to management code, when holiday on the
holiday list on the lower right hand corner is double-clicked, the date will be marked thick on the
calendar. When the date is double clicked, holiday registration screen will be displayed where user
can click ‘edit’ and ‘save’ as needed and/or click ‘delete’ button if ‘deleting’ is needed.

 When editing is done, click ‘save’ on the toolbar located on the upper side of the holiday
management screen.

 Delete holiday management

 Among the holiday managements on the upper left hand corner Combo, Select holiday
management that needs to be deleted.

 It can be chosen directly from Combo box or chosen with ‘previous( )’ or ‘next’( ) button

 Click the ‘delete’ button( ) on the upper side of the screen.

 Search holiday management

 Following screen will appear by clicking ‘holiday set up search’ button on the access control

management tab on the left hand corner of the main screen, or, clicking the ‘search’ button( ) on
the tool bar on the upper side of the register screen.

 Search with ‘holiday management name’ as search criteria

 Holidays that belong to holiday management can be viewed

 Holiday management can be selected with the ‘selection row’ with check boxes as shown in the

following screen. Select holiday management and click ‘delete’ button( ) on the toolbar to delete

selected holiday managements. Also, when ‘modify’ button( )clicked, selected holiday management
information will be displayed on the registration screen so that user can edit holiday managements.

149
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

Registering holidays

 Save holidays

 When the date to register is double clicked on the holiday management page, screen as above will
appear and respective holiday will be added on the lower right hand corner of the management
code page when holiday name and Descriptionisinserted. This is temporary addition and not
permanently saving in the database

 Delete holidays

 When holiday that belongs to registered holiday management code is double clicked in the calendar,
holiday management screen will appear and respective holiday name and Description will be marked.
When ‘delete’ is clicked on the page, deleted holiday will be excluded from the grid on the lower
right hand corner of the respective holiday management code. This is temporary deleting from the
grid on the screen and not directly deleting of the holiday.

150
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

7.1.2 Time Slot Setting

Time slot registration can set up the access time for the whole 24 hours of every 24 hours of the day or partially set
up for per hour zone from 1 interval to 5 interval. The registered time slot that has been set up here will set up the
time slot per day of the week in time schedule set up.

 Screen Description

Registering time slot

 Time slot name:Insert time slot name(Compulsoryfield to Insert)

 Description: InsertDescription for the time slot

 Using: Set up whether or not to set up time

 Time 1-5: Show time per hour time interval

 Function Description

Time slot registration

 Register time slot

 Mode will change to ‘input mode’ when ‘new’ button( ) on the toolbar on the upper side of the
screen

 Insert time slot name(Compulsory field to Insert)

 Insert in Description.

 ‘Usercheck’ according to number of time that are to be used. When ‘user checked’, the respective
times will be activated and defaulted to ‘0’. If interval setting of time slot is completed, click ‘save’

151
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

button( ) on the tool bar on the upper side of the screen to save.

 Modify time slot

 Chosse time slot to edit among the time zones that have been registered on the Combo on the
upper left hand side.

 It can be chosen directly from Combo box or chosen with ‘previous( )’ or ‘next’( ) button

 In the same way as registering, edit the time slot name, set up, interval and time and click ‘save’

button( )on the tool bar on the upper side to save.

 Delete time slot

 Choose time slot to delete among the time slots that have been registered on the Combo on the
upper left hand side.

 It can be chosen directly from Combo box or chosen with ‘previous( )’ or ‘next’( ) button

 Click the ‘delete’ button( ) on the upper side of the screen.

 In the same way as registering, edit the time slot name, set up, interval and time and click ‘save’

button( )on the tool bar on the upper side to save.

 Click the ‘delete’ button( ) on the upper side of the screen.

 Search time slot

 Click the ‘Search Time Slot’ on the left menu of main screen from access control tab, otherwise click

the ( ) button to get into the screen as below.

 Try to search time slot name as searching condition.

 The sectors which belong to each time interval are displayed.

 If there is checkbox on search screen, you can select the time slot as below. To delete selected time

slot, click the ( ) button on top toolbar

 Also you can change the applicable time zone using by the ( ) button

152
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

7.1.3 Timeschedule Setting

Time schedule setting up sets up time schedule per day of the week using ‘zone information ‘of the time zone. Time
schedule information per day of the week can be set per users to restrict access hours, and also be used for in and
output contact points of time schedule. Maximum of 15(iTDC) or Maximum of 10(other controllers) timeschedules can
be registered.

 Screen Description

Setting up time schedule

 Time schedule Code: Select time schedule code.

 Time schedule name: Insert time schedule name

 Description: InsertDescription for the time schedule

 Select Timeschedule: Set up time schedule by setting up time slot per day of the week. Time slot for
holiday can be set up on the ‘set up tab’ of holiday schedule.

 Display Time Slot for Each Weekday: Selected time slot set up value will appear as graph when time slot
per day of the week if set up.

 Function Description

Setting up time schedule

 Save time schedule

153
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Register time schedule

 Mode will change to ‘input mode’ when ‘new’ button( ) on the toolbar on the upper side of the
screen

 Select time schedule code, Insert time schedule name and Insert Description if additional Description
is needed. Set up time slot per day of the week.

 In order to register time schedule, more than 1 day of the week time slot needs to be set up.

 In order to set up time slot of holiday, select one of the holiday management list that have been
registered, then Select time slot.

 Click ‘save’ button( ) on the tool bar on the upper hand corner to save the set up times schedule
values

 Modify time schedule

 Select time slot to edit among the time slots that have been registered on the Combo on the upper
left hand side.

 It can be chosen directly from Combo box or chosen with ‘previous( )’ or ‘next’( ) button

 Edit time schedule name, Description, time slot per day of the week, then click ‘save’ button( ) on
the tool bar of the upper hand corner

 Delete time schedule

 Choose time slot to delete among the time slots that have been registered on the Combo on the
upper left hand side.

 It can be chosen directly from Combo box or chosen with ‘previous( )’ or ‘next’( ) button

 Click the ‘delete’ button( ) on the upper side of the screen.

 Send time schedule

 Send the data via controller and make functions that have been set up to work on the device

 Click ‘send’ button( ) on the tool bar on the upper side of the screen to send time schedule
information that have been Insert. (변경된 데이터가 있는 경우 저장 후 전송합니다.)

 Auto Transmission of Timeschedule

 Transmits inputted data to a device and makes function be applied to the device.

 Click New( ) button of tool bar on the top of screen and set each items and then click Save( )
button of tool bar on the top of screen. Or select a Timeschedule from combo on the upper left of

screen and click Save ( ).

 “Successfully saved. Do you want to transfer it?” message appears.

154
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Click “Yes” button and inputted information is transmitted.

 Receive time schedule

 Save time schedule information of the device after receiving it

 When‘receive’ button( ) on the tool bar on the upper side of the screen is clicked, receiving
screen will be displayed and time schedule information that have been set on the device will be
shown on the receive screen. If user is to apply the received information on the database, click‘save’

button( ) on the tool bar on the upper side of the screen. If not, close the window.

 Search time schedule

 Click ‘time schedule search’ on the access control management tab on the menus on the left side of

t he main screen, or click the ‘search’ button( ) on the tool bar on the upper side of the
‘registration screen’ to display the screen as below.

 Search with time schedule name as search criteria

 Time schedule information per day of the week or holiday time schedule information can been seen

 In the search screen as below, the ‘selection rows’ with ‘check boxes’ can Selecttime schedule –

Choosetime schedule and click ‘delete’ button( ) on the tool bar on the upper side of the screen

to delete the selected time schedules. Also, click ‘modify’ button( ) to display time schedule
information on the registration screen for user to edit time schedules

155
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

7.1.4 Access Group Setting

When running with more than one system, ‘Access group set up’ allows users to integrate or restrict access areas by
creating groups per access door that are linked to each system and sending per group when users are registered on
user registration screen.

 Screen Description

Setting up access group

 Company:Select company(Only allowed to Admin authority)

 Access group name:Insert access group name to be set up

 Description:Insert simple Description per access group

 Door List and Access Group List: Access door that have been mapped on company and the currently
registered access door list of access group will be shown

 Time schedule: Set up time schedule of the time when sending the selected access age to access door
list of the access group(Multiple access doors can been selected)

 Door List of Access Group: Access door list that have been registered on access group will be marked.

156
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Change Timeschedule: This is button to select time schedule to edit and apply on the selected access
door

Access group list

 Move( ) button: Select the already created access group and apply on access door list of access
group

 Function Description

Search

 Access group information will be shown when Combo on the upper side of the screen is clicked. Click
the data to search to have information to be shown onthe ‘input screen’.

 Click ‘left/right arrow shaped’ button( ) on the tool bar to show ‘before and after’ information of
the access group information that have been registered.

 Click ‘search’ button( ) on the tool bar if advanced search is needed. In this case, the screen will
move to the search page of the main screen.

157
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

Add access group(New registration)

 Click ‘new’ button on the tool bar on the upper side of the screen.

 All information will be changed to default.

 Insert information per input boxed. Yellow boxes are compulsory fields to insert in.

Select company

Select‘company’ only when logged in with ‘Admin authority’. In case of ordinary log-ins, company may
not be chosen but the company where the respective ID belongs to will be automatically be logged in.

 Select access door or access groups from access door list or access group list and move to access door
list of access group by clicking ‘move’ button( )

Door list and access group list

Time schedule and access door set as a pair in access group in access door list tab – i.e. access to certain
access door is possible only at certain time of time schedule that has been set together with the
accessdoor

Access group list tab can conveniently be used when access group to be newly created includes all the
contents of the previous access group and have few additional access doors registered.

 In order to edit time schedule in access door list that has been moved, Select access door to edit
(multiple selection possible), Select time schedule and click Apply button to apply.

 Click ‘save’ button( ) on the tool bar on the upper side of the screen

Modify access group

 Select Combo on the upper left hand side to have registered access group information displayed. Click
data to search to display information on the ‘input screen’

 Click ‘left/right arrow shaped’ button( ) on the tool bar to show ‘before and after’ information of
the access group information that have been registered

158
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 After editing, click ‘save’ button( ) on the tool bar to save

Delete access group

 Select Combo on the upper left hand side to have registered access group information displayed. Click
data to search to display information on the ‘input screen’

 Click ‘left/right arrow shaped’ button( ) on the tool bar to show ‘before and after’ information of
the access group information that have been registered

 Click ‘delete’ button( ) on the tool bar of the upper side of the screen.

159
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

7.2 Card Holder Setting

7.2.1 Registering employee

Employee registration is registering ID card of employees. Also, employee personal details are Insert– Respective
information is shown when verifying ID card and is used for search and printing out later.

 Screen Description

Employee registration – Basic Information

 Employee ID: Insert employee ID(Compulsory field to Insert)

 Name: Insert name of employee(Compulsory field to Insert)

 Device Display name(English): check on the check box then input the name to be displayed on
LX007(SR), LX505(SR)(you have to input the name if you checked it)

 Company:Select company. If company is chosen on the main tool bar, the field will be fixed so that
company may not be Selected later. If company is ‘all’ on the main tool bar, company may be chosen as
the field is activated(Compulsory field to Insert)

 Department:Select department(Compulsory field to Insert)

 Title:Select title

 Access type:Select type of access

160
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Description: Insert if additional Description is needed.

Employee registration – Basic Information– capturing picture

 Capture Photo: Capture face and click the capture photo button

 Set face according to the screen and click the capture button to have the captured picture shown as
above and have been window closed and the picture applied to the picture box of the employee
registration screen.

 Open: Search image file to register from the local PC

 Delete: Everything will be deleted not only from the respected screen but if saved in the database

Employee registration – Access card information

 Whether use the card: Decide whether or not card is used or not.

 Card type:Select type of the respective card(Compulsory item to Insert) There are 3 types – Access card,
Parking card, and Others

 Card number:Insert card number. Card number will be formed with 8 or 10 digit numbers according to
type(Compulsory field to Insert). PIN numbers that has 4 ~ 7 digits are available for the system that is
comprised of ‘505R, iCON100, LX505 and LX505SR’ only, not others.

 Password:Insertpassword (Compulsory field to Insert). Insert 4 digit number as password when


verification mode is used as card+password

 Card mode:Insert card mode (Compulsory item to insert). Card mode includes ‘ordinary user, manager,
visitor, alarm set up, alarm dismisser, handicapped, free alarm set up, free alarm dismisser, master,
security, special 1~8, absence

161
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Set to output level when LX device uses.

 Absence Code:Select‘absence‘ for the card mode to activate it to Select Absent code

 Issue date:Insert card issue date and time(Compulsory field to Insert)

 Return date:Insert card return date and time

 Valid date: Decide whether or not to set expiry date

 Valid Start date:Insert expiry beginning date and time to be activated when ‘expiry date’ is checked.

 Valid End date:Insert expiry end date and time to be activated when ‘expiry date’ is checked.

 Lost: Decide whether or not lost

 Lost date:Insert lost date and time to be activated when ‘lost date’ is checked

 Access group:Select among the registered access groups.[Once you select a company of Basic
Infromation tab, a list of access group that belongs to the company appears.]

 Description:Insert additional Description of the card is necessary

 Issue : After completing input items, do issue. Once you click Issue button, inputted information is
added to grid.

 Modify : Modifies information of issued cards. Select cards to be modified among issued cards and
move them to input item and change. Once you click Modify button, modified information is applied to
grid.

 Clear : When you want to delete information of newly issued card, not existing one, you can delete the
card by clicking clear button.

 Delete : When there are more than two registered cards, you can delete the card that you want to
delete. When there is only 1 issued card on grid, the Delete button is deactivated and you cannot use it.
But when you have registered cards more than one, the Delete button on the left of each cards on grid
is activated and once you click the Delete button on the left of the card that you want to delete,
information of the card in database is deleted.

 Overdue cards among registerd cards is displayed in red and you can distinguish them.

Employee registration – Detail Information

162
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Social Security ID: Insert the Social Security ID.

 Nationality:Insert nationality

 Email:Insert email address

 Gender: Select gender

 Mobile phone number: Insert mobile phone number

 Home phone number:Insert home phone number

 Office phone number:Insert office phone number

 Platenumber: Insert Car registration number

 Drivers license number:Insert drivers license number

 Vehicle Type:Insert type of car

Employee registration – User defined Field

163
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 User Defined Field: Directly Insert field value that user wants

 The fields in this list can be set up in the field menu of the user definition of option menu

Employee registration –Biometric Data management

 Fingerprint Management Using Finterprint Reader: Register using Hamster, exclusive bio verification data
registration device. Click ‘finger print registration’ button to have finger print window displayed. Capture
finger print and apply in the finger print registration window.

 Register Fingerprint Using Fingerprint Reader: When this option is chosen, finger print recognizer
selection list will be activated, and if finger print recognizer is chosen from the list, finger print
registration button will be activated so that user can register finger print with the chosen device by
clicking ‘finger print registration button’

 Receive Fingerprint Data From Specific Fingerprint Reader: When this option is chosen, finger print
recognizer list will be activated so that finger print device to receive information can be chosen. Click
finger print receive button to receive it.

 Select Fingerprint Reader: Select finger print recognizer. By using finger print recognizer, Select finger
print registration option(FGR006SR,FINGER006SR) to display device list, and Select finger print receiving
option button(FGR006,FINGER006,FGR006SR,FINGER006SR from finger print recognizer to display device
list.

 Use Biometric information: Decide whether or not to use biological information

 Fingerprint Management Using Hamster: Display the quality when registration finger print to Hamster

164
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Biometric data: Display finger print information value

Employee registration –Biometric Data management(new module)

 Fingerprint Management Using Finterprint Reader: Register using BioMini, exclusive bio verification data
registration device. Click ‘finger print registration’ button to have finger print window displayed. Capture
finger print and apply in the finger print registration window.

 Register Fingerprint Using Fingerprint Reader: When this option is chosen, finger print recognizer
selection list will be activated, and if finger print recognizer is chosen from the list, finger print
registration button will be activated so that user can register finger print with the chosen device by
clicking ‘finger print registration button’

 Receive Fingerprint Data From Specific Fingerprint Reader: When this option is chosen, finger print
recognizer list will be activated so that finger print device to receive information can be chosen. Click
finger print receive button to receive it.

 Select Fingerprint Reader: Select finger print recognizer. By using finger print recognizer, Select finger
print registration option(FGR006SR,FINGER006SR) to display device list, and Select finger print receiving
option button(FGR006,FINGER006,FGR006SR,FINGER006SR from finger print recognizer to display device
list.

 Use Biometric information: Decide whether or not to use biological information

 Fingerprint Management Using BioMini: Display the quality when registration finger print to BioMini

 Biometric data: Display finger print information value

Employee registration –Biometrics Data Management– Registering finger prints

165
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Picture as above will be displayed if finger print is registered by Hamster .

 Message: Guide for finger print registration

 Picture box: Finger print read is displayed

 Quality: Quality of the registered finger print is displayed

 Select the number of fingerprint template ( 5 templates to the maximum for MAC device)

 When trasmitted with more than two templates registered, fingerprints registered first and second will
be used

 Click the button above the finger desired to be scanned.

 Register the fingerprint when fingerprint registration pop-up is dispalyed and the light of Hamster is on.
Once fingerprint is registered, apply button will be activated so you can register your fingerprint

 Apply: Apply finger print data

 Finger print will be registered twice and the pictures above are shown as examples of such case. The
last picture shows how message is displayed when the quality of the registered finger print is low and
registration is done again. Quality needs to be better than level 3. If failed for 3 or more times, user
needs to register again.

 Viewing moving pictures: User can view moving pictures online how to register finger prints

Employee registration – Event and Alarm Status

166
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Start date:Insert starting date and time of the event to search

 End date:Insert end date and time of the event to search

 Event Type:Select type of event to search

 Search: Search event with the respective criteria

 Insert relevant criteria as above and click ‘search’ to have events displayed on the grid

 Click one on the grid list to have the location of the relevant event displayed on the graphic map on
the right hand side

Employee registration –Time and Attendance Setting

 Closing Rule Name: List set in the attendance closing guideline set up of attendance management will
be shown – users select wish-attendance closing guideline

167
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Closing Type: Attendance will be closed on monthly basis and the result will be summed(Attendance
closing type information already Insert before will automatically appear)

 Closing Basis Day: Set the standard date to collect attendance of the month(Attendance closing type
information already Insert before will automatically appear)

 Max Working Time: Set the maximum working hour that can be approved as ‘working’(Attendance
closing type information already Insert before will automatically appear)

 Closing Basis Time: Set the completion time of working of the day. The set time will be the standard for
closing data(Attendance closing type information already Insert before will automatically appear)

 Description:Description according to already Insert attendance closing guideline will appear

 Working schedule name: Select working schedule name

 Apply Time/Attendance: Select whether to apply attendance or not

 Work Type: Select work type (Regular / Shift)

 Function Description

Employee registration

 Save employee registration

 Mode will change to ‘Insert mode’ when ‘new’ button( ) on the toolbar on the upper sideof the
screen.

 Insert relevant data per field and click ‘save’ button( ) on the tool bar on the upper side of the
screen.

168
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Edit employee registration

 Select time zone to edit among the time zones that have been registered on the Combo on the
upper left hand side.

 It can be chosen directly from Combo box or chosen with ‘previous( )’ or ‘next’( ) button

 Edit relevant fields and save.

 Delete employee registration

 Select time zone to delete among the time zones that have been registered on the Combo on the
upper left hand side.

 It can be chosen directly from Combo box or chosen with ‘previous( )’ or ‘next’( ) button

 Click the ‘delete’ button( ) on the upper side of the screen.

 Send employee registration(Individual sending on the registration page)

 Choose time zone to delete among the time zones that have been registered on the Combo on the
upper left hand side.

 It can be chosen directly from Combo box or chosen with ‘previous( )’ or ‘next’( ) button

 Click ‘send’ ( ) button on the tool bar. (If you have changed data is transmitted and saved)

 Click “Yes” button.

 'Would you delete existing card data of the device before transmission?' message appears.

 Once you click 'Yes(Y)', existing card data of the device is deleted first, and then the card data is
transmitted. Once you click 'No(N).

 Individual sending allows to send selected data to device and have the set up function on the
device to be activated

 It will be sent to registered access door according to access group information of the relevant user

 Auto transmission of Employee registration. (Individual transmission from registration window.)

 Click New( ) button of tool bar on the top of screen and input each items and then click

Save( ) button of tool bar on the top of screen. Or Select an employee among registered

employees from combo on the upper left of screen and click Save( ) button.

 “Successfully saved. Do you want to transfer it?” message appears.

 Click “Yes” button.

 'Would you delete existing card data of the device before transmission?' message appears.

 Once you click 'Yes(Y)', existing card data of the device is deleted first, and then the card data is
transmitted. Once you click 'No(N).

169
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Individual transmission transmits selected data to a device and makes the set function work from
the device.

 Transmits to the door that is registered by access group information of the corresponding card
holder.

 Batch Transmit

 Batch Transmit is used to transmit all data that you searched.

 Once you click send( ) button after checking select columns, data of selected employees only is

transmitted. In case that you click Batch Transmit( ) without checking select cloumns, all of
searched data is transmitted to the device.

 After clicking ‘Transmit’( ) or ‘Batch Transmit’( ), once you click ‘Yes(Y)’ on a message that asks
you whether to confirm. ‘Would you delete existing card data of the device before transmission?’
message appears. Once you click ‘Yes(Y)’, existing card data of the device is deleted first and then
the card data is transmitted. Once you click ‘No(N)’, the card data is transmitted without deleting
existing card data of the device.


 ID Batch receive

 Click the ‘View Device’ then device lists are displayed on the window.(Only Biometric device are
displayed)

 Using by searching condition, selected employee’s information is sent to selected device.

 Check the select column then click the ( ) button to send the selected employee’s information. If

click the ( ) button without checking it, all employee’s information will be sent.

 Search employee registration

 Click ‘employee search’ in the access control management tab in the menu on the left side of the

main screen, or click ‘search’ button( ) on the tool bar on the upper side to have screen as below
displayed

 Search with criteria including employee id, employee name, department, title, position, issued date,

170
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

valid date, card number ,access group, whether to register.

 Registered card information per employee can be viewed according to search results.

 ‘Selection row’ with check boxes as picture below shows have employees selected. After selecting

employee, click ‘delete’ button( ) on the tool bar to delete selected employees. Also, click ‘modify’

button( ) on the tool bar to have information of the selected employees displayed on the
registration page so that user can edit each employee information.

 When it is batch transmission, not transmission of selected employees, the company and access

group should be selected befor clicking Batch Transmission( ) button.

171
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

8. BASIC SETTING & ADMINISTRATION

8.1 Basic settings

8.1.1 Reader Setting(Attendance)

This Page is to set up Reader bycompanies.

 Screen Description

Registering Reader

 Company:Select company to register the device. If user is Admin authorized, select company. If user is
‘company user authorized’, it will be fixed as ‘user company’.

 Reader list: currently registered access door and Reader will be displayed

 Registered Reader list: Actually registered Readers to company are mapped per field

 Function Description

Add and edit

 Select company

172
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Select the wanted-Reader from the ‘Reader list’ on the left and click ‘move’ button( ) to move to
‘Registered Reader List’ on the right.

 Click ‘save’ button( ) above to save.

Delete

 Select company

 Select the wanted-Reader from the ‘Registered Reader List’ on the right and click ‘move’ button( ) to
move to ‘Reader list’ on the left

 Click ‘save’ button( ) above to save.

8.1.2 Time and Attendance code setting

Set time and attendance code(time and attendance code and exception code) by company. By company, only a
single setting is available. The meaning of the code cannot be modified or deleted. User-define settings(1~4) can be
named and used depending on the companies’ needs.

 Screen settings

Time and Attendance code setting - time and attendance code

 Company : Select a company.

 Whether use or not : Check a code to use.

 Code name : Displays the code name to be displayed on the screen and the report.

 Duty acceptance : Tick off to display whether users acknowledge their work..

173
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Distinguishment : Can be checked either General or Period. . If Period is selected, registration is available
at Receive Exception and in case of General, go to Function key setting to use.

 Type : Distinguishes between Time and Day. If Distinguishment is Period, it’s type becomes Day and if
General is selected, it’s type is Time.

Time and Attendance code setting - exception code

 Code to display status based on the daily closing.

 Whether use or not : Check a code to use.

 Code name : Displays the code name to be displayed on the screen and the report.

 Features description.

Time and Attendance code setting - exception code

 Exception code

The type of exception codes

Early In: earlier arrival at work than regular starting hour of the work

Early Leaving: earlier departure from work than regular finishing hour of the work

Lateness: Later arrival at work than regular starting hour of the work

Late out: later departure from work than regular finishing hour of the work

Error Check : When there is no arrival or departure data, when starting data doesn’t make a pair with
finishing data while function key is used, when starting data is later than finishing data

Absence: When employees missed work on work schedule.

Unscheduled Work : When commute data that isn’t included to work code time assigned to work
schedule exists.

174
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Save time and attendance code/exception code

 Select a company.

 Check a code to use.

 Click save ( ) button and complete time and attendance code registration.

8.1.3 Closing Hour

Set up attendance management method, attendance type, automatic closing process time that will be used per
company.

 Screen Description

Option Setting

 Company: Select company.

 Attendance Type: Whether to use function key. If Using function key is checked, you can use function
key menu.

 Schedule Closing Time Setting: Check whether to use automatic closure processing (Automatic closure
processing is run by Agent of MS-SQL Server 2005. MS-SQL 2005 ExpressEdition has no Agent function
thus cannot use this function. When using MS-SQL2005 Server version, Agent needs to be run)

 Function Description

Option Setting

 Saving Option setting

 Select company.

 Select Attendance Type.

 If ‘Schedule closing time setting’ is checked, automatic closing can be done at certain registered
time.

 Click ‘save’ button( ) to complete ordinary set up.

175
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

176
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

8.2 Attendance Basic Setting

8.2.1 Overtime Setting

Setting up overtime (early arrive at work, over time work per day,weekly,monthly). Overtime work refers to extended
working hour of employees that exceeds the certain working time defined by policy of the company.

 Screen Description

Overtime Setting– Overtime(Early attendance)

 Calculate the overtime working hour according to Early Attendance

 Allowed minimum work: The total minimum working hour to be approved as overtime work

 Allowed maximum overtime: Maximum time to be approved as overtime work

 Allowed minimum overtime: Minimum time to be approved as overtime work

 Minimum overtime work permissible time deduction: It’s to check where you apply the minimum
overtime work permissible time deduction or not.

Setting over time – Overtime(Late out)

177
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Accumulation Time: Apply level per cumulative unit of the exceeded hour of standard working hour of
working schedule

 Daily Overtime(Late Out)

Daily overtime(Late out)is used to calculate overtime work done after working hour on the basis of
accumulation time

If maximum hours of overtime is 5 and extra pay is given in accordance with hours of overtime,
input the hours into overtime1~overtime5

If it needs to be devided by two hours at a time, enter 2:00 into overtime 1 and 04:00, which is
overtime1+02:00, into overtime 2 and input 05:00 into overtime3, which is overtime2+01:00

Suppose working hour is set as 09:00-18:00,

1-If employee A’s starting hour is 09:00 and finishing hour is 19:00, then his daily overtime is
overtime1-01:00

2-If employee B’s starting hour is 09:00 and finishing hour is 23:00, his daily overtime is overtime1-
02:00, overtime2-02:00, overtime3-01:00

Same rules are appied to weekly overtime work and monthly overtime work.

 Function Description

1) Overtime working set up

 Saving overtime working set up

 Select company(Compulsory field to Insert)

 Overtime work name(Compulsory field to Insert)

 Click ‘overtime(Early Attendance) ‘ check box

 Click ‘overtime(Early Attendance)’ tab

 Insert minimum working hour to be approved as overtime work, maximum allowance time as
overtime work, minimum overtime working hour allowance time

178
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Click ‘Daily Overtime(Late Out)’ tab

 Insert minimum working hour to be approved as overtime work, maximum allowance time as
overtime work, minimum overtime working hour allowance time

 Input the hours into overtime1~overtime5

 Click ‘save’ button( ) to complete overtime work set up registration

 If Early Attendance is not used, just Insert details for overtime work per day.

 Editing overtime work set up

 Choose overtime work set up to delete among the time zones that have been registered on the
Combo on the upper left hand side.

 It can be chosen directly from Combo box or chosen with ‘previous( )’ or ‘next’( ) button

 Edit each fields and click ‘save’ button( )

 Deleting overtime work set up

 Choose overtime work set up to delete among the time zones that have been registered on the
Combo on the upper left hand side.

 It can be chosen directly from Combo box or chosen with ‘previous( )’ or ‘next’( ) button

 Click the ‘delete’ button( ) on the upper side of the screen.

 Searching overtime work set up

 To display the screen as below, click the overtime work search on left main menu or click the ( )
button on top toolbar

 Search the overtime work name as search condition.

 The information for early or late attendance belongs to each overtime work can be displayed.

 On search screen, you can select overtime work on the checkbox. If you click the delete ( ) button
after selected overtime work, the selected overtime work is deleted. You can change the registered

overtime work in the window by clicking the change ( ) button on top toolbar.

179
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

8.2.2 Mealtime Setting

Depending on function key, there are differences for the break time screen. In case of the Function key, break time
for deduction is setting from mealtime data. If you do not use Function key, when employee works more than
minimum working time, breaktime is deducted. Set to deduction data is used by Closing process for calculating
actual working time. Formula as follows; Actual working time = Total working time – Mealtime deduction – Breaktime
deduction.

 Screen Description

Set Mealtime – Use Function Key

 Company : Select company.

 Mealtime Name: Insert Mealtime name.

 Description: Insert Description.

 Start Time: Insert starting time for meatimel.

 End Time: Insert ending time for mealtime.

 Time and Attendance Standard Unit: If time and attendance standard unit is registered, those will
display on the list, if one of them is selected it will be applied to assigned unit.

 The time except the range of mealtime: When meal event is occurred other than item number 1~8.

 No Data: It is applied when there is no data for Meal event. If user checks ‘Deduction’ and insert
‘Compulsory deduction time’ inserted amount of time will be deducted from total working time.

 Deduction: Check whether to deduct or not.

 Compulsory deduction: Two types of deduction exist on list. If user select ‘Actual Mealtime deduction’
the program deduct the actual mealtime (which is to be received from the device). If user select

180
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

‘Compulsory deduction’ regardless of actual mealtime, program deduct the forced deduction time
(which is to be inserted by user).

 Compulsory deduction time: Insert forced deduction time. Activated only when ‘Compulsory Deduction’
is selected.

Set Mealtime – Not use Function Key

 Mealtime Setting screen differs by usage selection of Function key.

 Minimum Worktime: Set minimum worktime to apply deduction time.

 Deduction Time: Set actual deduction time to be deducted from total worktime.

 Function Description

Saving Mealtime

 Select company. (Compulsory field to Insert)

 Insert mealitme name. (Compulsory field to Insert)

 Insert start time and end time of mealtime. (Compulsory field to Insert)

 Insert relevant data per field

 Click ‘save’ button( ) to complete mealtime set up registration

Modify Mealtime

 Choose mealtime set up to modify that have been registered on the Combo on the upper left hand side.

 It can be chosen directly from Combo box or chosen with ‘previous( )’ or ‘next’( ) button.

 Edit each fields and click ‘save’ button( )

181
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

Deleting Mealtime

 Choose mealtime to delete that have been registered on the Combo on the upper left hand side.

 It can be chosen directly from Combo box or chosen with ‘previous( )’ or ‘next’( ) button

 Click the ‘delete’ button( ) on the upper side of the screen.

Searching Mealtime

 To display the screen as below, click the search mealtime on left main menu or click the ( ) button on
top toolbar

 Search the mealtime name and company as search condition.

 On search screen, you can select mealtime on the checkbox. If you click the delete ( ) button after
selected mealtime, the selected mealtime is deleted. You can change the registered mealtime in the

window by clicking the change ( ) button on top toolbar.


182
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

8.2.3 Breaktime Setting

Depending on function key, there are differences for the break time screen. In case of the Function key, breaktime or
deduction is setting from mealtime data. If you do not use Function key, when employee works more than minimum
working time, break time is deducted. Set to deduction data is used by Closing process for calculating actual working
time. Formula as follows; Actual working time = Total Working time – Mealtime deduction – Breaktime deduction.

 Screen Description

Set Breaktime – Use Function Key

 Company : Select company.

 Breaktime Name: Insert Breaktime name.

 Description: Insert Description.

 Start time: Insert start time of Breaktime.

 End time: Insert end time of Breaktime.

 Time and Attendance unit: When ‘Time and Attendance unit’ is registered at appropriate stage, list of
units display and if user selects one of them, relevant Time and Attendance unit rule is applied.

 The time except the range of breaktime: Applied when exceptional event occur, which is other than
event no.1~8.

 No Data: Applied when there is no event regarding BreakTime. Check to use deduction and insert
forced deduction time then inserted hours of deduction time is deducted from the actual work time

 Deduction: Check whether to use or not.

183
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Compulsory deduction: Two types of deduction exist on list. If user selects ‘Actual BreakTime deduction’
the program deducts the actual BreakTime (which is to be received from the device). If user select
‘Compulsory deduction’ regardless of actual BreakTime, program deduct the forced deduction time
(which is to be inserted by user).

 Compulsory deduction time: Insert forced deduction time. Activated only when ‘Compulsory Deduction’
is selected

Breaktime Setting – Not use Function Key

 Mealtime Setting screen differs by usage selection of Function key.

 Minimum Worktime: Set minimum worktime to apply deduction time.

 Deduction Time: Set actual deduction time to be deducted from total worktime.

 Function Description

Saving Breaktime

 Select company. (Compulsory field to Insert)

 Insert breaktime name. (Compulsory field to Insert)

 Insert start time and end time of breaktime. (Compulsory field to Insert)

 Insert relevant data per field

 Click ‘save’ button( ) to complete breaktime set up registration

Modify Breaktime

 Choose breaktime set up to modify that have been registered on the Combo on the upper left hand
side.

 It can be chosen directly from Combo box or chosen with ‘previous( )’ or ‘next’( ) button.

184
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Edit each fields and click ‘save’ button( )

Deleting Breaktime

 Choose breaktime to delete that have been registered on the Combo on the upper left hand side.

 It can be chosen directly from Combo box or chosen with ‘previous( )’ or ‘next’( ) button

 Click the ‘delete’ button( ) on the upper side of the screen.

Searching Breaktime

 To display the screen as below, click the search Breaktime on left main menu or click the ( ) button
on top toolbar

 Search the Breaktime name and company as search condition.

 On search screen, you can select Breaktime on the checkbox. If you click the delete ( ) button after
selected Breaktime, the selected Breaktime is deleted. You can change the registered Breaktime in the

window by clicking the change ( ) button on top toolbar.


185
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

8.2.4 Function key Setting

Set up function key and working type of device that supports function key. Working type that is configurable with
function key has been ticked off at Work type tab of Work code setting. Check method is work code not date.
Eventhough check method of overtime work is time, it is excluded from that since it isn’t calculated by function key.
Function key can be set to maximum of 10 depending on the device and is also configurable when LX505,LX007
controllers are used. When FINGER007,505R are in use, the maximum number of function key configurable is 4. Each
type of work can only be registered with one start and one end. Therefore, the actual number of available category is
5

 Screen settings

Function key Setting

 Company : Select company.

 Those are able to be registered to Function key; Those are ‘Normal’ work type on Attendance code of
[Attendance and Exception] menu (Excluding OverTime)

 Settings are needed for each categories’ start and end time. Therefore, Actual number of categories
available for use is a maximum of 5.

 If you prefer not to use function key, select ‘Not in Use’.

 Function Description

Function Key Setting

 Save function key setting

186
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Select company

 Set working type as pair

 Click save button( ) below the tool bar at the top once setting is done

 Modify function key setting

 Select company

 Change setting information on working type

 Click save button( ) below the tool bar at the top once setting is done.

187
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

8.2.5 Work Time Code Setting

Setting up working hour by Inserting in arrival and departure time of work. Regular is used when commute time is
normally fixed. When ‘Using of the range allows exception’is ticked off, it is configurable to establish extent of
allowable range on early attendance,leaving early, lateness, lateout. If commute time is not fixed, Free commute can
be used to calculate the amount of working hours.

 Screen Description

Setting up working hour code - Regular

 Company: Select company(Compulsory filed to Insert)

 Working Time name:Insert code name(Compulsory filed to Insert)

 Regular: Can be used in case of regular work. If plural work time code needs to be assigned to each
weekday at [setting up work schedule], select <Regular>.

 Start Work Time:Insert starting hour at work(Compulsory filed to Insert)

 End Work Time:Insert finishing hour at work(Compulsory filed to Insert)

 Using of the range allows exception: Check the check box when exception code doesn’t need to be
displayed though employee’s arrival or departure time is slightly different from scheduled one. Set spare
time value before/after start work time and before after end work time.

 Using of the range allows exception: Check the check box when exception code doesn’t need to be
displayed though employee’s arrival or departure time is slightly different from scheduled one.

188
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Early attendance: Set up the standard on early attendance with allowable range of early attendance.
Only if a employee arrives earlier than time which subtracts allowable range of early attendance from
start time of work , ‘Early attendace’ will be displayed. For instance, when arrival time is 09:00 and
allowable range of early attendance is 10, work start time which is 08:55 is not considered as “early
attendance” while 08:45 will be “early attendance”

 Lateness: Set up the standard on lateness with allowable range of lateness. Only if a employee arrives
later than time which adds allowable range of lateness to start time of work, ‘Early attendace’ will be
displayed.

 Late out: Set up the standard on late out with allowable range of late out.

 Only if a employee departs later than the time which adds allowable range of late out to end time of
work, ‘late out’ will be displayed. For instance, when departure time is 18:00 and allowable range of late
out is 10, end time of work which is 18:05 is not considered “late out” while 08:15 will be “late out”.

 Over time: Select overt time work.

 Mealtime Name : Select mealtime name.

 Breaktime Name : Select breaktime name.

 Closing time for shift: Insert closing time for shift and select the basic date. . In case of shift, every work
time code must have closing time since each work has different finishing time. Closing time for shift can
be applied only when shift is selected as work time code and in case of regular work(besides shift),
“standard closing time”will be applied. It’s recommanded to allow some extra time when closing time
for shift is set considering overtime work. If closing time for shift is set at the same value with finishing
time, an error can occur when calculating data regarding overtime work or attendance of shift. For the
sake of convenience, the value of closing time for shift is automatically inputted with 18 hours added
and it can be changed into desired value. Shift setting is available at Shift menu.

 Description:InsertDescription for working code

Setting up working hour code – Free commute

189
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 O

 Free commute: Check if working type doesn’t require appointed start or end time.

 Using of appointed standard working time range is not in use: Employees can work whenever they want
as starting and finishing hour are not appointed. Since Working hour of mandatory doesn’t exists, the
actual amout of hours they worked will be counted.

 Standard working time: if exception attendance is accepted as working hour, “근무인정 시간” will be
applied. When employee who inserted 08:00 into Standard working time leaves for vacation, it is
considered employee worked for 8hours during the vacation.

 Using of appointed standard working time range: Starting and finishing hour of work are configurable.
Therefore, exception attendance including lateness, early attendance, leaving early, late out can be
shown.

 Start time: Insert starting hour for free commute

 End time: Insert finishing hour for free commute.

 Function Description

Setting up working hour code

 Save working hour code

 Mode will change to ‘Insert mode’ when ‘new’ button( ) on the toolbar on the upper side of the
screen

 Insert relevant data per field and click ‘save’ button( ) on the tool bar on the upper side of the
screen.

190
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Edit working hour code

 Select time zone to edit among the time zones that have been registered on the Combo on the
upper left hand side.

 It can be chosen directly from Combo box or chosen with ‘previous( )’ or ‘next’( ) button

 Edit relevant fields and save.

 Deleteworking hour code

 Choose time zone to delete among the time zones that have been registered on the Combo on the
upper left hand side.

 It can be chosen directly from Combo box or chosen with ‘previous( )’ or ‘next’( ) button

 Click the ‘delete’ button( ) on the upper side of the screen.

 Search working hour code

 To display the screen as below, click the overtime work search on left main menu or click the( )
button on top toolbar.

 Search work time code name as search condition.

 Each of work time code information can be checked.

 On search screen, you can select overtime work on the checkbox. If you click the delete ( ) button
after selected overtime work, the selected overtime work is deleted. You can change the registered

overtime work in the window by clicking the change ( ) button on top toolbar.

191
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

8.2.6 Work Schedule Setting

Set up working hours on weekly basis to be applied for attendance of employees. Work schedule must be set for the
employee who has regular weekly work schedule. In case of employee who doesn’t have regular work schedule(Shift),
set work time at monthly schedule. Work time code can be assigned to daily, work on weeked, work on holiday.

 Screen Description

Setting up working schedule

 Company: Select company

 Work schedule name:Insert working schedule name

 Description:InsertDescription for working schedule

 Registered Work list: Working hour code per selected company will be displayed. Select working hour
code to be set up.

 Weekday: Select the day of the week for the selected working hour code to be applied

 Biweekly off: Check the biweekly Saturdays to close

 Apply holiday: Set up whether to apply working hour of the registered holidays

 Function Description

Setting up working schedule

192
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Save working schedule

 Mode will change to ‘input mode’ when ‘new’ button( ) on the toolbar on the upper side of the
screen

 Insert working schedule name to register(Compulsory field to Insert)

 Select working code after selecting relevant day of the week. Move with the ‘move to the

right’< >, and ‘move to the left’< > button

 Click ‘save’ button < > on the tool bar to complete registration.

 Edit working schedule

 Select working schedule to edit among the access groups that have been registered on the Combo
on the upper left hand side.

 It can be chosen directly from Combo box or chosen with ‘previous( )’ or ‘next’( ) button

 Edit relevant fields and save.

 Delete working schedule

 Select working schedule to edit among the access groups that have been registered on the Combo
on the upper left hand side.

 It can be chosen directly from Combo box or chosen with ‘previous( )’ or ‘next’( ) button

 Click the ‘delete’ button( ) on the upper side of the screen.

 Search working schedule

 To display the screen as below, click the overtime work search on left main menu or click the ( )
button on top toolbar.

 Search work time code name as search condition.

 Each of work time code information can be checked.

 On search screen, you can select overtime work on the checkbox. If you click the delete ( ) button
after selected overtime work, the selected overtime work is deleted. You can change the registered

overtime work in the window by clicking the change ( ) button on top toolbar.

193
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

194
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

8.2.7 Closing Rule Setting

Setting up fields related to closing data creation.

 Screen Description

Setting up attendance closing guideline

 Company: Select company

 Closing Rule: Insert attendance closing guideline name

 Closing Type: Either Monthly or Weekly.

 Closing Basis Day: Set base date for monthly closure

 Closing basis Time: Set time of working completion of the day. The set time becomes the base of the
closing data creation. (Closing time is only applied to regular work. In case of shift, setting is available at
finishing hour of shift at [work time code setting] since starting hour of each employee is different from
each other.)

 Description:InsertDescription of Closing Rule

 Apply holiday work: Set up what working code to apply for holiday if decides to apply

 Registered Work Time List: All the registered working code list is displayed

 Work Time List for Holiday: Select working code to apply for holidays

 Function Description

Setting up Closing Rule

 SaveClosing Rule

195
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Mode will change to ‘Insert mode’ when ‘new’ button( ) on the toolbar on the upper side of the
screen

 InsertClosing Rule to register(Compulsory field to Insert)

 Select on the ‘Registered Work Time List’. Move to holiday applied working code with ‘move to

right’ button < >. Select Work time list for Holiday and move by using ‘move to the left’ button
< >. Only one can be chosen amongst ‘Registered Work Time list’.

 Click‘save’ button < > to compete registration

 Edit Closing Rule

 Select attendance closure guild line among the registered access types on the Combo on the upper
left hand side.

 It can be chosen directly from Combo box or chosen with ‘previous( )’ or ‘next’( ) button

 Edit relevant fields and save.

 DeleteClosing Rule

 Select attendance closure guild line among the registered access types on the Combo on the upper
left hand side.

 It can be chosen directly from Combo box or chosen with ‘previous( )’ or ‘next’( ) button

 Click the ‘delete’ button( ) on the upper side of the screen.

 Search Closing Rule

 To display the screen as below, click the overtime work search on left main menu or click the ( )
button on top toolbar.

 Search work time code name as search condition.

 Each of work time code information can be checked.

 On search screen, you can select overtime work on the checkbox. If you click the delete ( ) button
after selected overtime work, the selected overtime work is deleted. You can change the registered

overtime work in the window by clicking the change ( ) button on top toolbar.

196
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

8.2.8 Holiday Setting (Attendance)

Register official holidays other than Sundays in order to calculate the holiday working days. Add holidays.

 Screen Description

Register holidays

 Company: Select company

 Holiday name:Insert holiday name

 Date:Insert holiday date to register

 Description:InsertDescription for holiday

 Registered Holiday list: List of registered holidays

 Function Description

Setting up holiday registration

 Save holiday registration

 Insert relevant data per field and click ‘save’ button( ) on the tool bar on the upper side of the
screen.

 Edit holiday registration

 Select holiday names to edit among the access groups that have been registered on the Combo on
the upper left hand side.

197
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 It can be chosen directly from Combo box or chosen with ‘previous( )’ or ‘next’( ) button

 Edit relevant fields and save.

 Delete holiday registration

 Select holiday names to edit among the access groups that have been registered on the Combo on
the upper left hand side.

 It can be chosen directly from Combo box or chosen with ‘previous( )’ or ‘next’( ) button

 Click the ‘delete’ button( ) on the upper side of the screen.

 Search holiday registration

 To display the screen as below, click the overtime work search on left main menu or click the ( )
button on top toolbar.

 Search date or holiday name as search condition.

 Each of work time code information can be checked.

 On search screen, you can select overtime work on the checkbox. If you click the delete ( ) button
after selected overtime work, the selected overtime work is deleted. You can change the registered

overtime work in the window by clicking the change ( ) button on top toolbar.

198
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

8.3 Administration

8.3.1 Register Retire

This screen is used to register suspension employee or retiree. Arrival and departure data of employee who is
registered in suspension will not be processed from the day of registration. Insert ID,name and department of an
employee who needs to be registerd. Check the employee and select between suspension and retiremenet from
combo box. If suspension is selected, you can input ‘start date’ and ‘finish date’. When you select retirement, you can
enter ‘retirement date’.

 Screen Description

Register Retire

 Company: select company name

 Employee ID: Searches with ‘employee ID’ as search critera and displays content of employee ID
searched

 Name: Searches with ‘name’ as search criteria and displays content of employee searched.

 Dapartment: Searches with ‘department’ as search criteria and displays the contents of department
searched.

 Suspend/Retire: Select between suspend and retire.

 Retirement date: Activated if retired is selected.

 Start date: Activated if suspended is selected. Set up the start date of suspension

 End date: Activated if suspended is selected. Set up the end date of suspension.

199
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Description: put detailed explanation if needed

 Function Description

Set up suspension/retirement registeration.

 Save suspension/retirement registeration

 Input all data to each field and click save button( ) in the tool bar on the top of screen

 Modify suspension/retirement registeration

 Select the item needs to be revised from suspension/retirement list on the upper left hand corner
Combo.

 It can be chosen directly from Combo box or chosen with ‘previous( )’ or ‘next’( ) button

 When editing each item is done, click ‘save’ button.

 Delete suspension/retirement registeration

 From the suspension/retirement list on the upper left hand corner Combo, select item needs to be
deleted.

 It can be chosen directly from Combo box or chosen with ‘previous( )’ or ‘next’( ) button

 Click the ‘delete’ button( ) on the upper side of the screen.

 Search suspension/retirement registeration

 Go to Main screen and Basic setup and Operation management(Attendance) Tab and click

‘Suspension/Retirement’. Or go to Registeration page and click ‘Search’( )on the upper hand, then
screen below will appear.

200
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

8.3.2 Retirement Reservation Setting

Reserve retirement of employee. Search employee whose retirement is dued and select retirement date and save
then retirement reservation will be registered.

 Screen Description

Retirement reservation setting

 Company : select company.

 Employee ID: Search with ‘employee ID’ as search criteria and displays contents of searched employee
ID.

 Name: Search with ‘name’ as search criteria and display contents 0f searched name.

 Department: Search with ‘department’ as search criteria and displayes contents of searched department.

Set up retirement reservation registration

 Save registration of retirement reservation

 Input all data to each field and click save button ( ) in the tool bar on the top of screen

 Modify registration of retirement reservation

 Select the item needs to be revised from retirement reservation list on the upper left hand corner
Combo

 It can be chosen directly from Combo box or chosen with ‘previous( )’ or ‘next’( ) button

201
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Click save ( ) button once edting each item is done

 Delete registration of retirement reservation

 Select the item needs to deleted from the list of retirement reservation from the Combo box on the
upper left of screen.

 It can be chosen directly from Combo box or by ‘previous( )’ or ‘next’( ) button

 Click delete button( ) from the tool bar on the top

 Search registration of retirement reservation

 Clicking retirement reservation of the tool tab of basic setup and operation

management(attendance) from the left menu of the main screen or 'Search' ( ) button at the top
toolbar displays a screen as follows.

202
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

8.3.3 Receive Exception

In this part, exception attendance can be processed in advance. If ‘user defined 1-4’ are classified by period and ‘in
use’ is checked at Work code setting, applicable item can be registered and processed. The name of applicable code
can changes into item user needs. If ‘working approval’ is checked, work hour will be counted as registerd on the
schedule.

 Screen Description

Receive Exception

 Company: Select company

 Employee ID: Searches with ‘employee ID’ as search criteria and displays contents of searched employee
ID

 Name: Searches with ‘name’ as search criteria and displays contents 0f searched name.

 Department: Searches with ‘department’ as search criteria and displays contents 0f searched department

 Work code: Can select only among registered codes which are classified as ‘period’. Displays applicable
exception attendace received.

 Start date: Displays start date of received work code

 End date: Displays end date of received work code

 Function Description

Exception setting

 Save exception

 Input all data to each field and click’ save’ button ( ) in the tool bar on the top of screen

203
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Modify exception

 Select the item needs to be revised from exception attendance list on the upper left hand corner
Combo

It can be chosen directly from Combo box or by ‘previous( )’ or ‘next’( ) button

 Click save ( ) button once edting is done.

 Delete exception

 Select the item needs to be deleted from exception attendance list on the upper left hand corner
Combo.

 It can be chosen directly from Combo box or by ‘previous( )’ or ‘next’( ) button

 Click delete button( ) from the tool bar on the top

 Search exception

 Clicking exception attendance search of the tool tab of basic setup and operation

management(attendance) from the left menu of the main screen or 'Search' ( ) button at the top
toolbar displays a screen as follows.

204
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

9. SHIFT(ATTENDANCE)

9.1 Shift

9.1.1 Set Shift

 Organize hour shift when operationg shift work

 Screen Description

Set shift

 Company: Select company

 Shift: Input the name of the company to register

 Description: Input detailed explanation if needed.

 Employee list: Displays employee registerd in company. If an employee has to be registerd in shift,
select from employee list and click ( ) button. It also can be registered by drag-and-drop.

 Member: Displays registered employee in current shift. If an employee has to be romoved from the list,
select the employee and click( ) button. It also can be removed by drag-and-drop. The employee
who has been removed from member will be shown on <employee list>

 : Moves employee selected from <employee list> into <member>

 : Deletes selected employee from <member>.

 Function Description

205
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

Set up shift

 Save shift setting

 Input all data to each field and click’ save’ button in the tool bar on the top of screen

 Modify shift setting

 Select the item needs to be revised from shift list on the upper left hand corner Combo

 It can be chosen directly from Combo box or by ‘previous( )’ or ‘next’( ) button

 Click save ( ) button once edting is done

 Delete shift setting

 Select the item needs to be deleted from shift list on the upper left hand corner Combo

 It can be chosen directly from Combo box or by ‘previous( )’ or ‘next’( ) button

 Click delete button( ) from the tool bar on the top

 Search shift setting

 Clicking shift search of the tool tab of shift management(attendance) from the left menu of the main

screen or 'Search' ( ) button at the top toolbar displays a screen as follows.

206
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

9.1.2 Working time setting by Shift

Set working time by shift and arrange shift into a group. Registration of shift is available if you register more than
two groups. [working time setting by shift]and [working time setting by shift] are used only when shift rotation is
repeated consistently. If shift rotation changes often, it is more convenient to register working schedule directly from
[monthly schedule setting] not register [working time setting by shift] nor [working time setting by shift].

 Screen Description

Working time setting by Shift

 Company: Select company

 Working time name by shift : Input name of working time by shift to register

 Description: Input detailed explanation if needed

 The list of set to shift: Displays the shift registered from [shift setting]. Select shift and click ( )
button and the shift will be registerd at <Working time setting by Shift>. It also can be done by drag-
and-drop.

 Code list of defined work time: Displays work time code registered in [working time code]

 If you need to allocate working time code to shift, select the registered shift and click ( ) button at
<the list of set to shift>

 Working time setting by Shift: Displays each shift and assigned working time code in tree shape

 Shift : Assigns selected shift from <the list of set to shift>to <working time setting by shift>

 Shift : Deletes selected shift from <working time setting by shift>

207
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Work time : Assigns work time selected from <working time setting by shift> to the selected shift.
Working time code

 Work time : Deletes selected working time of shift from <Working time setting by shift>.

 Function Description

Set up working time by shift

Save working time setting by shift

 Input all data to each field and click save( ) button in the tool bar on the top of screen

 Modify working time setting by shift

 Select the item needs to be revised from the list of working time by shift on the upper left hand
corner Combo.

 It can be chosen directly from Combo box or by ‘previous( )’ or ‘next’( ) button

 Click save ( ) button once edting is done.

 Delete working time setting by shift

 Select an item to delete from list of working time by shift on the upper left hand corner Combo

 It can be chosen directly from Combo box or by ‘previous( )’ or ‘next’( ) button

 Click delete button from the tool bar on the top

 Search working time setting by shift

 Clicking working time search of the tool tab of shift management(attendance) from the left menu of

the main screen or 'Search' ( ) button at the top toolbar displays a screen as follows.

208
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

9.1.3 Shift Rotation Setting

Configure rotation of shift.. Shift group high on the <Shift rotation schedule>list starts work first. [setting working
time by shift]and [setting shift rotation] are used when rotation work is repeated constantly. If shift rotation changes
often, it is more convenient to register working schedule directly from [monthly schedule setting] not register
[working time setting by shift] nor [working time setting by shift].

 Screen Description

Shift Rotation Setting

 Company: Select company

 Name of shift rotation: Input number of shift rotation setting

 Description: Input detailed explanation if needed.

 The list of set working time by shift: Displays working schedule by shift registered at [Setting working
time by shift]. Click the schedule and ( )button to register at<Shift rotation schedule>. It also can be
done by drag-and drop. If you put mouse pointer on ‘Shift’ and ‘Working time code’, related
information will appear on tool tip.

 Shift rotation schedule: Displays working time to register as rotation in tree shape. With up and down
buttons, you can change it’s order.

 : Moves selected shift from <Working time list set by shift>to <Shift rotation schedule>

 : Deletes shift group selected from <Shift rotation schedule>

 : Move up shift group selected from <Shift rotation schedule>

 : Move down shift group selected from <Shift rotation schedule>.

209
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Function Description

Setting up Shift rotation

 Save shift rotation setting

 Input all data to each field and click ’save’ button in the tool bar on the top of screen

 Modify shift rotation setting

 Select the item to modify from shift rotation list on the upper left hand corner Combo.

 It can be chosen directly from Combo box or by ‘previous( )’ or ‘next’( ) button

 Click save ( ) button once edting is done.

 Delete shift rotation setting

 Select the item to delete from shift rotation list from Combo box

 It can be chosen directly from Combo box or by ‘previous( )’ or ‘next’( ) button

 Click delete button( ) from the tool bar on the top

 Search shift rotation setting

 Clicking shift rotation search of the tool tab of shift management(attendance) from the left menu of

the main screen or 'Search' ( ) button at the top toolbar displays a screen as follows

210
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

9.1.4 Set Shift Schedule

Set up monthly shift schedule. Select company and search with date then work schedule previously registered will be
shown or new registration is available. There are two ways to register monthly schedule. Select ‘Name of shift
rotation’ from <shift rotation list> if rotation of shift is repeated consistently. Also select whether to apply period,
appointed holiday, day of week and national holiday then monthly schedule can be registered, which will be
automatically repeated. In case of rotation that changes often, you can register schedule individually by selecting
desired date from monthly schedule..

Below is an example of double-shift divided into morning and afternoon shift.

* Consisted of shift : shift A/ shift B

* Work time: Morning shift(06:00 – 14:00)/ afternoon shift (15:00 – 23:00)


* Work time by shift: Shift A starts with morning shift/ shift B starts with afternoon shift

Register shift A at [Set shift]

Register shift B at [Set shift]

211
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

Assign work time code at [working time setting by shift]. Allocate am wrctime to shift A and pm wrctime to
shift B. ‘‘Work time code name’is set as ‘A am/B pm’ so it can be easily distinguished.

Assign work time code at [working time setting by shift]. Allocate am wrctime to shift A and pm wrctime to
shift B. ‘‘Work time code name’is set as ‘A am/B pm’ so it can be easily distinguished.

Set up rotation at [Shift rotation setting]. The name of shift rotation is set as “A rotation” and ‘A am/B pm’
group is set to work first. Folllowing is how to register schedule of shift rotation.

212
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

Select the company which has information on registered rotation shift . Then also select 2014-01 and click
search button.

213
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

Set up schedule where shift A takes turn with shift B at intervals of 3days from 01-01-2014 to 31-01-2014.
Select ‘Name of shift rotation’ and set up period as ‘2014-01-01 ~ 2014-01-31’ with Cycle set as 3 each days.

Then click add button. Click save( )button once items are added as picture above.

 Screen Description

Set up monthly schedule

214
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Company: Select company

 Shift rotation list: Shows information on shift rotation registered at [Shift rotation setting]

 Apply shift rotation schedule : Applies shift rotaiton schedule with period, appointed holiday/week select,
day of week off, whether to apply holiday, whether to exclude cycle, cycle ect.

 Period: Select start and end date to set up shift rotation schedule.

 Select appointed holiday/week : Apply appointed holiday/week on rotation shift rotation schedule. Work
schedule on holiday will be neglected.

 Day of week off: Fixes specific day of the week as fixed holiday. Work schedule on holiday will be
ignored

 Whether you apply holiday or not: Check whether to apply holiday. If there is registered holiday, work
schedule will be ignored..

 Whether you apply holiday or not: If checked, work period is not applied to holiday.

 Select whether you use holiday application period excluding or not: Work period is not applied to
holidays. Designated holidays, national holidays will be skipped and changed work schedule will be
created.

 For example 2 shifts exist. Shift SetA (Shift1-Daytime duty, Shift2-Nighttime duty), Shift SetB (Shift1-
Nighttime duty, Shift2-Daytime duty). Rotate 2 shifts with rotation cycle of 3days. If you want to

215
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

create work schedule from March1 to March7, here March3 is set as public holiday. Check for
holiday use and uncheck holiday application period excluding, then working schedule of Shift Set A
is March1 and March2. Assume March3 is public holiday schedule will not be generated though
holiday will be included to rotation cycle therefore Shift Set B will have work schedule from March3
to March6. Lastly Shift Set A will start work again on March7. Other case, if you check holiday
application and holiday application period excluding is also checked. March3 is holiday and will be
excluded from schedule hence Shift Set A will work from March1 to March 4 and Shift Set B will
have a work schedule form March5 to March 7..

 Cycle: Set rotation cycle

 Click ‘Add’. Work schedule will be created according to condition setting

 Modify: Modifies existing work schedule by set condition.

Set up monthly schedule - Individual

 Setting window will be displayed if you double click the date when you set monthly schedule for shift.

 Shift: Select the shift to set up. The list of registerd shift name will be shown in the combo box.

 Work time code: Select work time code to set up. The list of registered work time code will be shown in
the combo box.

 New: Initializes the list of (Combo box)shift name and (combo box)work time code. To add new shift,
click ‘new’button then click ‘enter’button

 Enter: Select shift and work time code from the list and click enter. It will be add on grid.

 Modify: Changes the value of selected item.

 Cancle: Cancles schedule setting and ends setting window.

 OK: Adds set shift schedule to monthly schedule.

 Function Description

216
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

Set up monthly schedule

 Save monthly schedule setting

 Create shift schedule which meets applicable condition and click ‘save ( )’ button at the top toolbar

 Modify monthly schedule setting

 Select company.

 Select the date to modify and click search button.

 Select shift rotation list .Set up schedule period to change and conditions then click ‘Modify’ button

 click ‘save ( )’ button at the top toolbar.

 Delete the setting of monthly schedule

 Select company

 Select the date of schedule needs to be deleted and click search button

 Appoint an area to delete from calendar with mouse.

 Click delete button ( ) at the top tool bar.

 Click save button( ) at the top tool bar

 Search settting of monthly schedule

 Set up conditions in the information of monthly schedule setting

 Click search button

217
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

9.1.5 Work on Holiday Setting by Shift

For calculating work hour on holidays and weekends, you need to register [Work on holiday setting by shift].
Set up work time of work on weekend, work on holiday by shift registered from [shift setting] Lateness, absence
without notice will not be displayed since ‘work on weekends’ or ‘work on hoidays’ is not mandatory unlike work
schedule registerd at [Monthly work schedule setting]Work time code assigned from ‘work on weekend’ will be
applied to week day for which work schedule hasn’t created. Also work time code allocated to ‘work on holiday’ will
be given to national holidays

 Screen Description

Work on Holiday setting by shift

 Company: Select company

 Work on Holiday name by shift: Insert name of work on holiday by shift

 Description: Input detailed explanation if needed

 The list of set to shift: Displays shift registered from [shift setting]. Select shift and click ( )button so
you can register shift at <The list of work time on weekends/holidays by shift>. It also can be registerd
by drag-and-drop

 Code list of defined work time: When work time code needs to be assigned to shift, click shift from
<The list of work time on weekends/holidays by shift>and select work time code to be assigned from
<Code llist of defined work time>then click ( )button or drag and drop.

 Working time list by shift on holiday/weekend: Displays each shift and assigned work time code in tree
shape

218
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Shift : Assigns selected shift from <The list of set to shift> to <The list of work time on
weekends/holidays by shift>

 Shift : Deletes selected shift from <The list of work time on weekends/holidays by shift>

 Work time : Assigns Selected work time from < Code list of defined work time > to selected shift
from <The list of work time on weekends/holidays by shift>

 Work time : Deletes work time of shift selected from <The list of work time on weekends/holidays
by shift>.

 Function Description

Set up holiday work by shift

 Save holiday work setting by shift

 Enter all inputs of items and click save ( ) button at the top tool bar.

 Modify holiday work setting by shift

 Select an item to change among the list of registered holiday work by shift from combo box on the
top left

 It can be chosen directly from Combo box or by ‘previous( )’ or ‘next’( ) button

 Click save ( ) button once edting each item is done.

 Delete holiday work setting by shift

 Select an item to delete among the list of registered holiday work by shift from combo box on the
top left

 It can be chosen directly from Combo box or by ‘previous( )’ or ‘next’( ) button

 Click delete button at the top tool bar

 Search holiday work setting by shift

 Clicking holiday work by shift search of the tool tab of shift management(attendance) from the left

menu of the registration screen or 'Search' ( ) button at the top toolbar displays a screen as
follow.s

219
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

10. CLOSING(ATTENDANCE)

10.1 Closing process

10.1.1 Daily Closing

Close the data of the respective date.

 Screen Description

Daily closing process

 Start date: Select the date to start the closing process

 End date: Select the date to end the closing process

 Closing: Close the data of the respective date. If there is working date per respective date, close and
show the list.

 Cancel: Delete the data closed. If the data closed is wrong data, Click‘cancellation’ button to delete close
data, edit at ‘revise & edit of closed work’ and do closing again

 Reclosing: If changed based on event data or if there is addition of attendance guideline, create closure
again.

220
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Folder path: Closed list can be saved in text or excel file. Select route to save file.

 Export: Sent out data list on grid as excel or text file

 Search: If there is data closed for the respective date, ‘search’ button is activated and user can search
with search criteria(employee name, department, attendance type etc)

221
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

10.1.2 Weekly Closing

Close data of the appointed date on a weekly basis.

 Screen Description

Weekly closing process

 Company: Select company

 Closing rule : Shows list of weekly closing rule , connected with closing rule set earlier. If there is no
closing rule set as weekly closing type, nothing will be shown on the list so set up closing rule that is
weekly type

 Closing: Proceed closing data on assigned date. If work data exist on assigned date, complete closing
process and displays the list.

 Cancle: Delete the data closed. If weekly closing process data contains flawed data, click ‘Cancel’ to clear
closing data and go to closing revision and correct inaccuracy and re-do the closing process

 Period: Configured period will be displayed.. This process is done weekly. If closing processed data exists
on applicable week, you need to configure another period and close.

 Search: When closed data exists on applicable date, search button will be activated and you can search
with search condition( Employee name, dapartment, method of work management).

222
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

10.1.3 Monthly Closing

Close monthly data

 Screen Description

Monthly closing process

 Closing Rule Name: Shows Closing Rule that has been set as monthly closure process. If there is no
attendance closure guideline of Compensation payment type set up as Monthly, list will not show user
anything, thus new Monthly type attendance closure guideline needs to be set up.

 Closing: Closes the data of the respective time period. If there is working data for the time period,
closing will be done and list will be displayed

 Cancel: Delete the data closed. If the data closed is wrong data, Click‘cancellation’ button to delete close
data, edit at ‘revise & edit of closed work’ and do closing again

 Month: Select the month to close

 Period: If compensation calculation base date is set on attendance closure guideline page, monthly
closure time will be automatically set according to the base date.

223
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Search: If there is data closed for the respective date, ‘search’ button is activated and user can search
with search criteria(employee name, department, attendance type etc)

224
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

10.1.4 Revise Daily Closing

Editing if there is error or left over data existing after closing. Cancellation of closing of the date to edit needs to be
done in advance.

 Screen Description

Revising & editing closed work

 Company: Select the company you wish to search. You have to select it even in saving or deleting.

 Period: Select the time period to search.

 Employee ID: Input employee’s ID from search condition.

 Name: Input employee’s name from search condition.

 Department: Select department from search condition.

 Position: Select position from search condition.

 Title: Select Title from search condition.

 Closing Rule: Select closing rule from search condition.

 Search: Search can be done with various criteria including employee number, employee name,
department, title, position, attendance closure guideline

 Clear: Click erase button to erase data Insert for the field

 Employee’s number: It displays employee’s number. User cannot input it. On correction data list, double
click the data then the information of the selected line is displayed. Otherwise on closing date menu,
use the processed closing data as context menu then add it. The selected employee’s number is

225
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

displayed.

 Name: It displays Employee’s name. User cannot input on it.On correction data list, if you click the data
then information of the row of selected data is displayed. Otherwise on closing date menu, use the
processed closing data as context menu then add it. The selected employee’s information is displayed.

 Closing date: Set closing date of employee to correct.[Compulsory]

 Work time code: Select work time code of employee to correct. [Compulsory]

 Attendance code: Select attendance code of employee to correct. [Compulsory]

 Start date: Set data of employee’s going to work then input the time for going to work.[Compulsory]

 End date: Set date of employee’s leaving work then input leave work time. [Compulsory]

 Whether to protect data: Check if data shouldn’t be removed during re-closing proccess..

 Total worktime: Input employee’s total worktime to correct. [Compulsory]

 Reason: Input the reason why the employee’s information has corrected. [Compulsory]

 Correction Data: By search condition, the lists of data available to correct are displayed.If there are no
data by search condition it means no working data or closing processing in the applicable period.If
there are working data but it’s not displayed, you have to cancel the closing processing about
applicable period in closing date menu.

 Function Description

Edit

 Lists display on searched correction data by search condition.

 On the list, select the data you wish to change then double click it, so selected data’s information in
closing correction is displayed.

 Revise and click ‘save’ button( ) on the tool bar on the upper side of the screen.

Delete

 Lists display on searched correction data by search condition.

 Double click the data you wish to delete in the list.

 Click the ‘delete’ button( ) on the upper side of the screen.

226
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

10.2 Report

10.2.1 Workcode/Exception Setting Report

On this page, data can be searched by workcode/ exception code and report can be printed out

Report consists of checked codes from [Basic setting and operation management(Attendance) – basic setting – work
code setting] and it can be printed out. User-define code can be named as needed..

 Screen Description

Report Type – WorkCode

 Regular: Shows regular work data which includes arrival and departure data.

 Overtime: Displays overtime data among work data

 User Dfine1-4: modifiable by company. In case of time, you can set functon key and see occurred event
data. Aslo if it is a period, you can find data registered at exception receipt.

Report Type – Exception Code

 Early Attendance: Shows early attendance data among work data

 Leaving Early: Shows data of leaving early among work data

 Lateness: Shows lateness data among work data

 Late out: Shows data of late out among work data

 Error Check: Shows error check data among work data

 Absence without notice: Shows data of absence without notice among work data

 Unscheduled work: Shows data of unscheduled work among work data

 Type: Type of report is either employee or date.

227
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

Search criteria

 Company: Select company. If it is not selected, the name registered from user define 1-4 will be
displayed. If the name hasn’t changed, basic name will be shown.

 Period: Set the period to search report

 Name: Searches employee’s name of the company.

 Sort Type: Set up display order of data when report is printed out.

 Order type : Select the order standard selected above to be in either ascending or descending order

 Function Description

Pre-view and printing out of report

 This report is designed to fit A4 size.

 Select company of search criteria.

 Search employee by clicking ‘( )’ button


 Click company and items used in workcode setting will be activated among work/exception codes.

 Select an item to see between work code and exception code.

 Select which to use employee or date as an standard

 Set up period.

 Search employee’s name of the company

 Select sort type and sort order.

 Click Show report( ) at the top tool bar. If there is searched result, it will be displayed as below.

228
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Regular report by employee


 Regular report by date

229
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Overtime report by employee

 Overtime report by date

230
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 UserDefine1 Report by employee[Name has been changed to Business Out]


 UserDefine1 Report by date [Name has been changed to Business Out]


231
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 UserDefine2 Report by employee [Name has been changed to Education]


 UserDefine2 Report by date [Name has been changed to Education

232
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 UserDefine3 Report by employee [Name has been changed to Business Trip]


 UserDefine3 Report by date [Name has been changed to Business trip]

233
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 UserDefine3 Report by employee [Name has been changed to Sick ]


 UserDefine3 Report by date [Name has been changed to Sick]


234
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Early Attendance report by employee


 Early Attendance report by date


235
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Leaving early report by employee


 Leaving early report by date


236
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Lateness report by employee


 Lateness report by date


237
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Late out report by employee


 Late out report by date


238
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Error check report by employee


 Error check report by date

239
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Absence without notice report by employee


 Absence without notice by date

240
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD


 Unscheduled work report by employee


241
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Unscheduled work by date

242
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

10.2.2 Closing report

Function to have closing report, that meets search criteria according to saved closing information data, printed out as
output.

 Screen Description

Search criteria

 Period: Select the time period to search closing report

 Report type: Users can Select daily closing report(individual), person, closing rule, monthly closing report

 Employee name: Relevant when search employee name

 When having employee as search criteria, click the button to have employee list displayed so that
the user can select the employee to view

 Report type: Users can Select daily closing report(individual), individual, attendance closure guideline,
monthly, weekly closing report

 Sort Type: Set up display order of data when report is printed out

 Select among employee name, department and date

 Sort Order

 Select the order standard selected above to be in either ascending or descending order

 Select work Code: Select working code to select.

 Work Code that are used for Work Code menu will be displayed

 Select the fields to be shown on report.

 Function Description

Pre-view and printing out of report

 Set up time period of search criteria.

243
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Search employee by clicking ‘( )’ button.

 Closing Rule in search criteria is activated when monthly closure report is selected amount report type.
Select the activated button.

 Select report type – either Daily closure report or Monthly closure report.

 User can select option per individualClosing Rule when Daily closure report option is selected for report
type.

 Select the order standard for order criteria

 Select order type for order criteria

 Click ‘Report Preview’ button( ) on the upper side of the page. If search result exists, it will be
displayed as below.

 To export preview screen, click Export button of toolbar and the screen is exported to a file of type that
you want.


244
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

245
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

246
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

10.2.3 Statistics Report

 This screen is for searching and printing out statistic report .

 Screen Description

Search criteria

 Period: Set up period to search statistic report

 Report type: Choose among daily individual, the sum of individual, daily department, the sum of
department statistic report.

 Daily individual statistic report:: Shows time of the event corresponding to selected work code and
the number of occurrence of the event by individual and by date. Then also displays sum

 The sum of individual statistic report: Displays time of the event corresponding to selected work
code and the total number of occurrence of the event by individual

 Daily department statistic report: Shows time of the event corresponding to selected work code and
the total number of occurrence of the event by department and by date

 The sum of department statistic report: Displays time of the event corresponding to selected work
code and the total number of occurrence of the event by department.

 Name: Search name of employee

 When you search for employee with search condition, click this button so that you can see the list
of employees and choose the one you are looking for

 If you click company and select daily individual, the sum of individual statistic report, search button
will be activated.

 Department: Searches department name of the company

 When you search department with search condition, click corresponding button so you can see
department list and select the department you want.

247
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 If you select company and choose daily department, the sum of department statistic report, search
button will be activated.

 Sort Type: Configure the order of data on report

 Sort Order

 Select whether to arrange in ascending/descending order.

 Select work code: Select work code you want

 Company: Select company then employee search button will be activated.

 Work code used at menu of work code setting will be shown

 Select items to display on report..

 Function Description

Report Preview and print out

 This report is designed to fit A4 size.

 Set up period to be searched.

 Select the company of the chosen work code

 Choose option of daily individual, the sum of individual, daily department, the sum of department
statistic report at report type of search condition.

 Search employee by clicking ‘( )’ button

 A case of selecting daily department, the sum of department statistic report


 A case of selecting daily department, the sum of department statistic report

248
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD


 Select the order standard for order criteria.

 Select order type for order criteria.

 Click ‘Report Preview’ button( ) on the upper side of the page. If search result exists, it will be
displayed as below.

 Daily individual statistic report


 The sum of individual statistic report

249
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD


 Daily dapartment statistic report


 The sum of department statistic report

250
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

10.2.4 Suspension/Retire Report

 This screen is for searching and printing out report on suspended/retired worker Screen Description

 Screen Description

Search criteria

 Company: Select company

 Date: Select the date to search a report of suspended/retired worker

 Suspend/Retire: Select between suspend/retire as search condition.

 Sort Type: Set up display order of data when report is printed out

 Sort Order

 Select the order standard selected above to be in either ascending or descending order

 Function Description

Pre-view and printing out of report

 This report is designed to fit A4 size.

 Select company

 Select date

 Select between suspend and retire.

 Select the order standard for order criteria

 Select order type for order criteria

 Click ‘Report Preview’ button( ) on the upper side of the page. If search result exists, it will be
displayed as below.

 Suspension report

251
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD


 Retirement report

252
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

10.2.5 Mealtime Setting Report

This screen is for searching and printing report on meal time.

 Screen Description

Search condition

 Company: Select the company.

 Mealtime name: Insert mealtime name as search condition.

 Sort Type: Set up display order of data when report is printed out

 Sort Order

 Select the order standard selected above to be in either ascending or descending order

 Function Descripton

Preview Report and Print

 This report is designed to fit A4 size.

 Select the company.

 Insert Mealtime name.

 Select the order standard for order criteria.

 Select order type for order criteria

 Click ‘Report Preview’ button( ) on the upper side of the page. If search result exists, it will be
displayed as below.

253
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

254
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

10.2.6 Breaktime Setting Report

This screen is for searching and printing report on breaktime

 Screen Description

Search condition

 Company: Select the company.

 Breaktime name: Insert mealtime name as search condition.

 Sort Type: Set up display order of data when report is printed out

 Sort Order

 Select the order standard selected above to be in either ascending or descending order

 .

 Function Description

 This report is designed to fit A4 size.

 Select the company.

 Insert Breaktime name.

 Select the order standard for order criteria.

 Select order type for order criteria

 Click ‘Report Preview’ button( ) on the upper side of the page. If search result exists, it will be
displayed as below..

255
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

256
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

11. VIDEO

11.1 DVR Setting

11.1.1 Recorder Setting

Define model, access, access authority, etc. of Recorder.

 Screen Description

Recorder setting

 Defining Recorder and model

 Recorder model name : Select model name of the Recorder from the combo box. If you click "Auto
Search" button, the program automatically searches for connected Recorders.

 Recorder Name : Input a name of Recorder.

 The Number of Channel : Displays the number of channels.

 Whether Use or Not:Select whether you want use it or not.

 Recorder connection setting

 IP Address : Input the IP address

 IP port : Input the IP port.

 MAC address : The MAC address is displayed.

 Recorder access authority setting

 Log-in ID : Input the log-in ID. (Caution : To use live video of the Recorder, you need to register a
user who has an authorities for live view and search.)

257
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Password : Input a password.

 Description : Input the description.

 Function Description

 Recorder auto search

 Auto Search : The program searches for Recorders automatically.

 Select : Select a Recorder.

 Close : Closes the auto search window.

 Recorder registration

 Clicking New( ) button at the top toolbar enables input mode.

 Fill each item and click 'Save' ( ) button at the top toolbar.

 Recorder change

 Select a Recorder to change on the top left.

 You can select one directly from the combo box or use 'Previous' ( ) or 'Next' ( ) button.

 Change each item and click 'Save' ( ) button at the top toolbar.

 Recorder deletion

 Select a Recorder to delete on the top left.

 You can select one directly from the combo box or use 'Previous' ( ) or 'Next' ( ) button.

 Click 'Delete' ( ) button of at the top toolbar.

 Recorder search

 Clicking Recorder Search of the tool tab of the left menu of the main screen or 'Search' ( ) button
at the top toolbar displays a screen as follows.

258
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Search using Recorder as a search condition.

 From a search window as follows, you can select Recorders from rows with checks boxes, and once

you click 'Delete' ( )button after selecting Recorders, the selected Recorders are deleted.Also, once

you click 'Modify' ( ) button at the top toolbar , the information of the selected Recorders are
displayed on the registration window and you can change each Recorder.

11.1 Camera Setting

Define camera information, camera name, building-floor information, whether to use graphic map, and icon.

 Screen Description

Camere Setting

 Camera information

 Whether Use or Not: Shows whether a camera is being used or not.

 Channel : Shows channel of the corresponding camera.

 Camera Name : Shows names of cameras.

 Whether Use PTZ or Not : Shows whether PTZ is being used or not.

 Use graphic map : Shows whether graphic map is being used or not.

259
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Building Name : Shows names of buildings.

 Floor Name : Shows names of floors.

 Camera name setting

 Camera name : Input a camera name.

 Setting of weather to use camera and PTZ.

 Whether Use or Not: Input weather to use.

 Whether Use PTZ or Not : Input weather to use PTZ or not.

 Description : Input the description of a camera.

 Building-floor information setting

 Building-floor : Select building-floor information of the DVR from the combo box.

 Setting of whether to use graphic map and icon

 Use graphic map : Select whether to us graphic map from the combo box.

 Icon : Select an icon from the combo box.

 Function Description

 Camera registration

 Select a Recorder to which register a camera from the combo box of quick search at the top toolbar.

 Fill each item and click 'Save' ( ) button at the top toolbar.

 Camera change

 Select a camera to change from camera information on the top.

 Change each item and click 'Save' ( ) button at the top toolbar.

 Camera search

 Clicking Camera Search of the tool tab among menus on the left of the main screen or 'Search'

( ) button at the top toolbar of the registration screen displays a screen as follows.

 Search using Camera name as a search condition.

 Double click a row of a camera to change from a search screen below, and you can go to change
screen.

260
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

11.2 MileStone Setting

11.2.1 MileStone Server Setting

Settings screen allows the user to set up connection information, access privileges, etc. Input IP address for the PC,
port account, etc. In the case that you enabled your firewall, disable the firewall or open the port to communicate.

 Screen Description

Milestone Server- Settings

 Milestone Server Information

 Milestone Server Name : Enter Milestone server name for easier management.

 IP Address : Enter the IP Address for the PC with Milestone server installed

 IP Port : Enter the IP Port setup when installing Milestone Server(Xprotect family)
Default port is 80. Open the port when the firewall is present.

 Log-In ID : Enter the account for the PC in which Milestone server installed.

 Password : Enter the password for the PC in which Milestone server installed.

 Connection Check : Check the Milestone server connection to test if the entered information is
correct.

 Description : Enter more information if needed.

 Function Description

 Server Registration

 Input each item and click Save( ).

 Milestone server can be registered more than one.

 Server Modification

261
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Select a Milestone server to be modified on the left right corner.

 Click Save ( ) after revising.

 Server Deletion

 Select a Milestone server to be revised on the left right corner.

 Click Delete ( ) to delete the server.

 Server Search

 Click Search ( ) from the toolbar on the top or click Milestone server search on Tools tab on the
left to find Search button to open the search screen shown below.

 Search by Milestone server name.

 In the search screen below, the user can select a Milestone server using the check boxes on the left.

Selected server can be deleted using the Delete ( ) button on the top toolbar or modified using

Modify ( ), which leads to a Milestone server modification screen.

11.2.2 MileStone Camera Setting

The user can set up and register camera availability, PTZ availability, building-floor, map, icons, etc. shown on the grid
chart by searching the camera list registered in Milestone server[Xprotect family] and selecting one moving it to the
grid.

 Screen Description

Milestone Camera Settings

262
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD


 Searched Camera List

 This screen shows the searched camera list previously registered in Milestone Server [Xprotect
family].

 Camera ID : This is an unique ID that is automatically assigned when the camera is registered in
Milestone Server.

 Camera Name : shows the camera name inputted when the camera is registered in Milestone Server.

 PTZ Availability : shows the availability of PTZ function for cameras registered in Milestone Server.

 Camera Search

 Search button allows the user to look up information for cameras registered in Milestone Server
[Xprotect family] when Enterprise Application is connected to the server. Searched cameras will be
shown in the searched camera list screen.

 Registered Camera List

 ( ) button allows the user to move a camera from the searched camera list to the registered
camera list.

 Only the cameras not saved in the database can be removed from the registered camera list by
clicking ( ) button. Cameras saved in the database are highlighted in colors. But cameras which
are not saved in the database are not highlighted in colors.

 This screen shows the cameras registered in the database. Cameras saved in the database and
cameras not saved are shown in different colors.

 Select : allows the user to select a camera device in the row when deleting or saving. Deletion and
Saving apply only to the selected devices.

263
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Camera ID : This is an unique ID thatis automatically assigned when the camera is registered in
Milestone Server.

 Camera Name : shows the camera name put when the camera is registered in Milestone Server..

 Availability : allows the user to set up registered cameras’ availability.

 PTZ Availability : allows the user to set up registered cameras’ PTZ availability. PTZ availability
cannot be set up if the camera does not contain the function.

 Building-Floor : allows the user to set up building-floor information for registered cameras.

 Map Usage : allows the user to set up map usage for registered cameras.

 Icon Name : allows the user to set up icon names.

 Icon : shows the icon corresponding to the icon name set up.

 Description : Enter more information if needed.

 Select All

 The user can select(check) all cameras in the registered camera list.

 Unselect All

 The user can unselect(remove check) all cameras in the registered camera list..

 Function Description

 Camera Registration

 Select a Milestone server to register a camera in from the Combo-box on Quick Search on the top
corner.

 Click the camera search button after checking the connection status of a selected Milestone server.

 List of cameras, which are registered from Xprotect family Milestone server, is shown in the grid
chart.

 Select a camera to register in the grid and click ( ) button to move to it to the registered camera
list grid chart.

 After choosing selectable items from the grid chart and check marked on it.

 Click Save( ) on the toolbar in the top corner.

 Click ( ) button to delete an item while registering with ( ) button..

 Cameras saved in the database will be shown in colors.

 Only the selected items on the registered camera list will be applied to the database.

 Camera Modification

264
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Allows the user to modify the information of cameras shown in colors on the registered camera list
(those saved in the database).

 Check mark on selected item.

 Click Save ( ) button on the top toolbar.

 Camera Deletion

 Select a Milestone server on the top left corner to which the camera to be deleted is registered.

 Select a camera to be deleted from the registered camera list.

 Click Delete ( ) button from the toolbar at the top.

 Camera Search

 Click Search( ) button on the top toolbar or click Work tab > Video >Milestone Camera Search
from Menu on the left of the main screen to open the screen shown below.

 Search by Camera Name.

11.3 Camera

11.3.1 Camera Mapping

Maps cameras to devices.

 Screen Description

Camere Mapping

265
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD


 Device selection

 Reader : Tick when you want to show readers on the video device list.

 Input : Tick when you want to show inputs on the video device list.

 Camera mapping

 Camera list : Displays a list of registered cameras.

 Device list : Shows a list of devices.

 Function Description

 Device selection

 Tick whether you want to see readers and input on the video device list.

 Camera mapping

 From the camera list (a list on the left), select a camera you want, click the move ( ) button and
the camera moves to the device list (list on the right).

 Click 'Save' button ( ) at the top toolbar to save.

 Delete Camera mapping

 From the camera list by company (a list on the right), select a camera you want, click the move
( ) button and the camera moves to the camera list (list on the right).

 Click 'Save' button ( ) at the top toolbar to save.

 Search Camera mapping

 Clicking Camera Mapping of the tool tab among menus on the left of the main screen or 'Search'

( ) button at the top toolbar of the registration screen displays a screen as follows.

266
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Search using Recorder name, camera name, and device as search conditions.

 Double click a row of a camera to change from a search screen below, and you can go to change
screen.

267
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

11.4 Search

11.4.1 Search Video Data

Searches video data.

 Screen Description

Search Video Data


 Search condition

 Event time : Input when the event happened.

 Card number : Input a card number.

 Event type : Input the type of the event.

 Name : Input an employee's name.

 Device name : Input the device name.

 Search : Input search conditions and click the search button to search.

 Search result

 Date : Displays the date.

 Building : Displays the building.

 Floor : Displays the floor.

268
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Door : Displays the door.

 Device name : Displays the device name.

 Event type : Displays the type of event.

 Card number : Displays the card number.

 Name : Displays the employee name.

 Company name : Displays the company name.

 Department name : Displays the department name.

 Position name : Displays the position name.

 Function Description

 Video data search

 Input search conditions in the search condition above and click the 'search' button.

 Results that meet search conditions are displayed.

269
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

11.5 Report

11.5.1 DVR and Camera Setting Report

Shows DVR and camera settting information as a report.

 Screen Description

DVR and Camera Setting Report


 Search condition

 DVR model name : Input the DVR model name.

 DVR Name : Input a name of DVR.

 Select sort type and sort order

 Sort type : Select DVR name or DVR model name.

 Sort order : Select ascending order or descending order.

 Report preview

 Date : Shows when the report is printed.

 DVR detailed information : Shows DVR model name, DVR name, the number of channels, IP address,
IP port, and descriptions.

270
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Camera detailed information : Shows channel, camera name, whether to use or not, whether to use
PTZ or not, building-floor, map usase, and descriptions.

 Function Description

 DVR model name search

 Click search ( ) button on the right of DVR model name of search condition above.


 Click the check box of the DVR to search and click 'OK' button.(You can select more than one DVR.)

 Report View

 Click 'View report'( )button at the top toolbar.

 To print preview screen, click 'print' button of the report priview toolbar.


 To export preview screen into a file of a form you want, click 'export' button of report preview
toolbar.

271
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD


272
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

12. LIFT

12.1 Lift Setting

12.1.1 Lift Setting

Define the name of the lift, building, reader information, and device information.

 Screen Description

Floor Setting Tab

 Lift name and building setting

 Lift name : Input the name of the lift.

 Building : Select the building name from the combo box.

 Description : Input the description.

 Available floor list

 Displays floor list that registered to the selected building.

 Registered Building-Floor List

273
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Displays floor list that registered to the lift.

Device Setting Tab

 Reader information

 Reader type : Select Proximity readers, proximity readers + keypads or biometric reader.

 Reader mode : Select RF Only, RF + Password, or RF + Fingerprint.

 Reader mode time schedule : Select the time schedule from the combo box.

 Reader 1 (2, 3, 4)

 Use/Not Use : Select between 'Use' and 'Not Use'. (Reader 1 is fixed to 'Use')

 Leader name : Input reader name.

 Biometrics reader : Select the biometrics reader from the combo box. The reader is activated only
when the type is biometrics readers.

 Lift Device Information

 Available Lift Device list : Displays a list of devices which can be registered as the lift.

 Registered Lift Device List : Displays a list of devices which is registered as the lift.

 Function Description

 Lift setting registration

 Clicking New( ) button at the top toolbar enables input mode.

274
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Input the lift name in the [Lift Name] field.

 Select [Building].

 Buildings, that are registered from the Building-floor setting, are displayed.

 Select a floor to register from the available floor list of the selected building, and click move < >
button and move to the right. Or set it by drag-and-drop using the mouse.

 Click [Device Setting] tab.

 Set reader information. 'Use/Not Use' of Reader 1 should be set to 'Use', and you cannot change it.

 Input reader name in the [Reader Name] field.

 Select [Reader type].

 There are Proximity readers, proximity readers + keypads and biometric reader for the reader type. If
you select biometrics reader for the reader type, you must select [biometrics reader].

 Reader 2 ~ reader 4 are optional based on your need.

 Setting lift device information.

 Select a controller to register from the available device list, and click move < > button and move
to the right. Or set it by drag-and-drop using the mouse.

 Click save ( ) button on the toolbar.

 Lift setting modification

 Select a lift to change from the quick search combo box on the top left.

 You can select one directly from the combo box or use 'Previous' ( ) or 'Next' ( ) button.

 Change each item and click 'Save' ( ) button at the top toolbar.

 Lift deletion

 Select a lift to delete from the quick search combo box on the top left.

 You can select one directly from the combo box or use 'Previous' ( ) or 'Next' ( ) button.

 Click 'Delete' ( ) button of at the top toolbar.

 Lift setting send

 Select a lift to send from the quick search combo box on the top left.

 You can select one directly from the combo box or use 'Previous' ( ) or 'Next' ( ) button.

 Click 'Send'< >button of at the top toolbar. (If you have changed data is transmitted and saved.)

 Lift search

 Clicking Lift Search of the tool tab of the left menu of the main screen or 'Search' ( ) button at

275
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

the top toolbar displays a screen as follows.

 Search using the lift name and the building as search conditions.

 From a search window as follows, you can select lifts from rows with checks boxes, and once you

click 'Delete' ( )button after selecting lifts, the selected lifts are deleted.Also, once you click

'Modify' ( ) button at the top toolbar , the information of the selected lifts are displayed on the
registration window and you can change each lift.

276
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

12.1.2 Lift Output Setting

When you register a lift, 12 output points of the lift are created automatically. (Unlike other output points, for lift
output points, you need to set the floor to select the lift and the floor on the[Lift access group setting].) Output
points of the lift controller are matched to buttons of each floor. You can set a different floor to an ouput point, and
you can set operation time and time schedule for each output point.

(You cannot match a floor, which is matched to a floor, to another floor.)

 Screen Description

Lift Output Setting


 Lift basic setting

 Lift name : Select lift name from the combo box.

 Lift output point setting

 Lift name : Displays the lift name.

 Device name : Displays the device name.

 Output point No. : Displays output point address.

 Floor : Input or displays a floor.

 Output Time : Input or displays the output time.

277
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Time schedule : Input or displays the time schedule.

 Function Description

 Lift output point setting

 In the case of output point, because 12 output points are created automatically when you register a
lift, select the registered lift by clicking [Quick Search] on the toolbar or lift combo box. Although 12
output points are created automatically when a lift is created, because floors are not set to it, you
need to register to use on output point and access group.)

 Select [Floor]. Once a floor is set to the output point, the floor is displayed when setting access
group.

 Select [Output time]. This is optional. Set it when you need. Output works during the set time. The
default is [Not Use] when the floor is [Not Use], and [03 sec] when a floor is set.

 Select [Time Schedule]. This is optional. Set it when you need. Set is when you use output function
with time schedule for each output. You can make the output work during the set time schedule
and do not work during the rest of the time schedule. The default is [Time schedule not use].

 Click 'Save' ( ) button of at the top toolbar.

 Click [Yes] when asking whether to transfer after successful saving, or click transfer button to
transfer the setting information to the device. (To check transfer status and result, launch
[Monitoring] > [Integrated monitoring] before clicking transfer button. Transfer result of each item is
displayed on the [Program Event] window of the integrated monitoring screen.

 Lift output point setting modification

 Select a lift to change from the quick search combo box on the top left.

 You can select one directly from the combo box or use 'Previous' ( ) or 'Next' ( ) button.

 Change each item and click 'Save' ( ) button at the top toolbar.

 Lift Output Setting Send

 Select a lift to send from the quick search combo box on the top left.

 You can select one directly from the combo box or use 'Previous' ( ) or 'Next' ( ) button.

 Click 'Send'< >button of at the top toolbar. (If you have changed data is transmitted and saved.)

 Lift output point search

 Clicking Lift output point search of the tool tab of the left menu of the main screen or 'Search' ( )
button at the top toolbar displays a screen as follows.

278
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Search using the lift name as search conditions.

 From a search window as follows, you can select lifts from rows with checks boxes, and once you

click 'Modify' ( )button after selecting lifts, output points information of the selected lifts are
displayed and you can modify output points of each lift.

279
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

12.2 Lift Access Group Setting

12.2.1 Lift Access Group Setting

Set access group of the lift.

 Screen Description

Lift access group setting

 Lift access group basic setting

 Company : Select the company from the combo box.

 Lift access group name : Input the name of the lift access group.

 Time schedule : Select the time schedule from the combo box.

 Description : Input the description.

 Lift access group floor setting

 Lift floor list : Displays floor list that registered to the lift.

 Access group lift floor list : Displays floor list that registered to the lift access group.

280
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Function Description

 Lift access group setting registration

 Clicking New( ) button at the top toolbar enables input mode.

 Select [company].

 Input [Lift access group name].

 The remaining items are optional. Input them when you need. (In the case of applying time schedule
and linking the access group to the time schedule, you can make it work during the set time
schedule and do not work during the rest of the time schedule. The default is [Time schedule not
use].)

 Select a floor to register to the access group from the [Lift floor list], and click move < > button
and move to the right. Or set it by drag-and-drop using the mouse.

 Click 'Save' ( ) button of at the top toolbar.

 Lift access group setting modification

 Select an item to change from the quick search combo box on the top left.

 You can select one directly from the combo box or use 'Previous' ( ) or 'Next' ( ) button.

 Change each item and click 'Save' ( ) button at the top toolbar.

 Lift access group setting deletion

 Select an item to delete from the quick search combo box on the top left.

 You can select one directly from the combo box or use 'Previous' ( ) or 'Next' ( ) button.

 Click 'Delete' ( ) button of at the top toolbar. (In the case that the access group to delete is
assigned card holders, you cannot delete the access group.)

 When asking whether to delete, click [Yes] to delete.

 Lift access group search

 Clicking Lift access group search of the tool tab of the left menu of the main screen or 'Search' ( )
button at the top toolbar displays a screen as follows.

 Search using the access group name and the lift name as search conditions.

 From a search window as follows, you can select lift access groups from rows with checks boxes,

and once you click 'Delete' ( )button after selecting lift access groups, the selected lift access

groups are deleted. Also, once you click 'Modify' ( ) button at the top toolbar , the information of
the selected lift access groups are displayed on the registration window and you can change each
lift access groups.

281
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

282
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

12.3 Report

12.3.1 Lift Access Group Report

Displays lift access group report.

 Screen Description

Lift access group report

 Search condition

 Company name : Select the company from the combo box.

 Lift access group name : Input the name of the lift access group.

 Select sort type and sort order

 Sort type : For sort type, select lift access group name or time schedule name.

 Sort order : Select ascending order or descending order.

 Report preview

 Date : Shows when the report is printed.

 Lift access group search basic information : Displays lift access group name, company, time schedule
name, description, etc.

283
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Lift access group detailed information : Displays lift name, building, floor, etc.

 Function Description

 Report View

 Click 'View report'( )button at the top toolbar.

 To print preview screen, click 'print' button of the report priview toolbar.


 To export preview screen into a file of a form you want, click 'export' button of report preview
toolbar.

284
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

12.3.2 Accessible Floor Report by Person

Displays Accessible Floor Report by Person.

 Screen Description

Accessible Floor Report by Person

 Search condition

 Employee number : Input employee number.

 Card number : Input a card number.

 Name : Search for employee's name and input.

 Select sort type and sort order

 Sort type : For sort type, select employee number, card number, employee name, company name, or
department name.

 Sort order : Select ascending order or descending order.

 Report preview

 Date : Shows when the report is printed.

 Card holder information : Displays employee number, card number, employee name, company name,

285
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

department name, lift group, etc.

 Function Description

 Employee name search

 Click search ( ) button on the right of DVR model name of search condition above.


 Report View

 Click 'View report'( )button at the top toolbar.

 To print preview screen, click 'print' button of the report priview toolbar.


 To export preview screen into a file of a form you want, click 'export' button of report preview
toolbar.

286
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

287
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

12.3.3 Accessible Card Holder Report by Lift

Displays accessible card holder report by lift

 Screen Description

Accessible Card Holder Report by Lift

 Search condition

 Lift name : Search for lift name and input.

 Select sort type and sort order

 Sort type : For sort type, select lift or building.

 Sort order : Select ascending order or descending order.

 Report preview

 Date : Shows when the report is printed.

 Lift Information : Displays lift name, floor, description, etc.

 Card holder information : Displays employee number, card number, employee name, company name,
department name, time schedule, etc.

288
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Function Description

 Lift name search

 Click search ( ) button on the right of DVR model name of search condition above.


 Report View

 Click 'View report'( )button at the top toolbar.

 To print preview screen, click 'print' button of the report priview toolbar.


 To export preview screen into a file of a form you want, click 'export' button of report preview
toolbar.

289
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD


290
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

13.CARD DESIGN

13.1 Card Design Wizard

13.1.1 New Card Design Wizard

[New card design wizard] offers 4 setting steps for you to register a card design quickly and easily.
To save the card design, set all 4 step that [New card design wizard] offers and click [Save] button.
The card design that you have set from [New card design wizard] is completed when you do card design on the
[card design registration] screen which is activated after your clicking [Save].

New card design wizard - card design initial setting

 Screen description

 In this step, you can set basic information of your card design.

 Card design basic information is basic date to distinguish card designs.

 You have to input company name, card design name, and purpose to move on to the next step.

 How to use screen

 Step 1) Select a company name to use for the card design. (Essential)

 Information of card holders and visitors that you can use for the card design is only the information

291
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

that is registered to the selected company.

 Step 2)Input a card design name to use for the card design. (Essential)

 Card design name represents the card design. You should input a card design name which is unique
to each company.

 Step 3) Select purpose of the card design. (Essential)

 In the case of selecting 'For employee', you can design cards using card holder database.

 In the case of selecting 'For visitor', you can design card using visitor database.

 Step 4) Input description of the card design.

 You can input freely up to 200 characters when you have something to record to the card design
information. (Optional)

 Step 5) 'Next' button is activated when you input or select company name, card design name, and
purpose.

 Click [Next] and move to the next step.

New card design wizard - card size setting

 Screen description

 In this step, you cans set card size for your card design.

 Card size means size of work space that is displayed on the card design registration screen. In other
word, it is the size of card to print.

 How to use screen

 How to do with plastic card.

292
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Step 1) To print a card using plastic card, tick plastic card.

 Step 2) Select name of a plastic card to use.

 Step 3)Check width and height of the selected plastic card.

 Step 4) Click [Next] and move to the next step.

 How to do with label paper

 In the case of selecting label paper, you can set both sides mode in the next step (both sides of
card setting).

 Step 1) To print a card using label paper, tick label paper.

 Step 2) Select name of label paper to use.

 Step 3) Check width and height of the selected label paper.

 Step 4) Click [Next] and move to the next step.

 How to do with user definition

 When there is not a size that you want to use, you can set card size manually using user definition.
Input the card size referring to the unit conversion table(Unit conversion table contents - 100Pixel ≒
1Inch ≒ 2.6Cm).

 Step 1) Tick user definition.

 Step 2) Input width to use in an integer. (Maximum : 1150)

 Step 3) Input height to use in an integer. (Maximum : 1150)

 Step 4) Click [Next] and move to the next step.

 Table of supported plastic cards and label papers.

(Unit : Pixel)

Paper
Type Name Width Height
orientation

CR-80 330 208 Width

Plastic CR-79 329 204 Width

Card CR-80(V) 208 330 Height

CR-79(V) 204 329 Height

Avery 2940 ID Badge Labels 336 216 Width

Label
Avery 2944 ID Badge Inserts 288 384 Height
Paper

Avery 2946 Laminated ID Badges 318 198 Width

293
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

Avery 2947 Fold & Clip ID Badges 336 216 Width

Avery 2949 Fold & Clip ID Badges 372 282 Width

Avery 2960 Thermal ID Badges 204 336 Height

Avery 2961 Thermal Fold & Clip ID Badges 336 204 Width

Avery 2962 Thermal Fold & ClipID Badges 204 336 Height

Avery 2990 Labels for Access Control Cards 323 203 Width

Avery5095 Self Adhesive Name Badges 282 182 Width

Avery 5140 Print or Write Name Badge Labels 324 225 Width

Avery 5384 Clip Style Name Badges 384 288 Width

Avery 5883 Pin Style Name Badges 306 177 Width

Avery 74461 Clip Style Name Badges 336 213 Width

Avery74551 Pin Style Name Badges 360 237 Width

Avery 74552 Pin Style Name Badges 288 189 Width

Avery 8395 Self Adhesive Name Badges 324 224 Width

3) New card design wizard - card both sides setting

 Screen description

 In this step, you cans set whether to use both sides of a card.

 Card both sides setting is to set whether front and back of a card exists or not.

294
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 One side card is used when you design front of a card only. When printing, only the front of a card is
printed.

 Both sides card is used when you design both front and back. When printing, front and back both are
printed.

 In the case that a printer dose not support both sides print, you need to supply card or paper manually.

 How to use screen

 How to do with one side card

 Step 1) Tick one side mode to use one side card.

 Step 2) Click [Next] and move to the next step.

 How to do with both sides card

 In the case that you have selected label paper in the previous step (card size setting), you cannot
select this.

 Step 1) Tick both sides mode to use both sides card.

 Step 2) Click [Next] and move to the next step.

 4) New card design wizard - card background setting

 Screen description

 In this step, you cans set background color or image of a card.

 Card background color is a color that is displayed on the corresponding face of a card.

 Set card back ground color, and the color is displayed on the corresponding face of a card when
printing.

295
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Card background image is an image that is displayed on the corresponding face of a card.

 Set card back ground image, and the image is displayed on the corresponding face of a card when
printing.

 How to use screen

 In the case that you have selected one side mode, only front side background setting is displayed.

 In the case that you have selected both sides mode, both front and back side background setting is
displayed.

 In the case that you click [Save] after setting nothing in card background setting , the background of a
card becomes white.

 Once you click [Save], card design information which is set in [New card design wizard] is saved, and
[Card design registration] screen to which the information from [New card design wizard] is applied is
displayed.

 How to set background color

 Step 1) Tick fill color.

 Step 2) Click [find color].

 Step 3) Select a color you want from the color table. (Click [Make user definition color] and you can
choose a color you want as the following color table.)

 Step 4) Click [OK] button.


 <Color table that appears when you click [Find color] button.>

 Step 5) Check if the chosen color is displayed at the preview.

 How to set background image

 Step 1) Tick fill image.

 Step 2) Click [find image].

 Step 3) Select the images that are stored on your computer. (You cannot select an image of which
size is over 500kb.)

 Step 4) Click [Open] button.

296
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD


 <File open window that appears when you click [Find image] button.>

 Step 5) [Image editor] screen appears. (See how to use the [image editor].)

 Step 6) Click [Apply] button that is at right bottom of [Image editor].

 Step 7) Check if the chosen image is displayed at the preview.

 How to use [Image editor]

+
 Use original image.

 Click [Apply] button that is at right bottom of [Image editor].

 Select a part of an image

 Step 1) On an image at the left of the [Image editor], create rectangular area to use as an card
background image using mouse.

 Step 2) The image of selected area is displayed at top right of [Image editor].

 Change selected area of an image

 Step 1) On an image at the left of the [Image editor], create rectangular area to use as an card
background image using mouse. (Do this if you have not chosen an area.)

297
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Step 2) Pressing a box at the corner of the created rectangular area, move mouse to recreate an
area.

 Step 3) The image of selected area is displayed at top right of [Image editor].

 Image scale up/down

 Use buttons beside the scale up/down input field of [image editor], or input an integer directly.
(Minimum : -10, Maximum : 10)

 Image rotation

 Use buttons beside the rotation input field of [image editor], or input an integer directly.

 (Minimum : 0, Maximum : 360)

 Image reset

 Click [Image edit reset], and the image goes back to original one.

 Save edited image into a computer

 Edited image is the one that is selected part of an original, extended/reduced, or rotated.

 Step 1) Edit an image using [Image editor].

 Step 2) Click [Save] button at the right bottom of [Image editor].

+
+ <Save confirmation window that appears when you click [Save] button>

 Step 3) On the save confirmation window, click [Yes] button.

+
+ <File save window that appears when you click [Yes] button on the save confirmation
window.>

 Step 4) File save window appears as above.

298
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Step 5) Input a file name to save and select a file format.

 Step 6) Click [Save] and the edited image is saved into your computer.

 Apply the edited image to card background image.

 Step 1) Edit an image using [Image editor].

 Step 2) Once you have done editing, click [Apply] button at the right bottom.

 5) New card design wizard - common buttons

 [Previous] button

 Click [Previous] button at the right bottom of [New card design wizard] and you can go to previous step.

 [Next] button

 [Next] button at the right bottom of [New card design wizard] is activated when you have done
inputting essential items. Click [Next] and you can go to the next step.

 [Cancel] button

 Click [Cancel] button at the right bottom of [New card design wizard] and you can close [New card
design wizard].

 [Save] button

 [Save] button at the right bottom of [New card design wizard] is activated when you have done the last
step. Clicking [Save] button saves a card design to which set information is applied and finishes [New
card design wizard].

 Clicking [Save] button on the [New card design wizard], card design that you have set from [New card
design wizard] is displayed on the [New card design] screen.

299
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

13.2 New Card Design Management

13.2.1 New Card Design

On [New card design], you can design new card and change existing card designs.
A card design that is registered from [New card design] is used to print cards on [Staff card print] and [Visitor card
print].
It is recommended to draw objects which is used to card design in the canvas. If an object is on the edge of the
canvas, when printing on label paper or normal paper, the object may be printed outside of the printing area.

New card design - basic setting

 Screen description

 Input basic information of a card design here.

 Card design basic information is basic date to distinguish card designs.

 You have to input company name, card design name, and purpose to save a card design.

 How to use screen

300
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Step 1) Select a company name to use for the card design. (Essential)

+ Information of card holders and visitors that you can use for the card design is only the
information that is registered to the selected company.

 Step 2)Input a card design name to use for the card design. (Essential)

+ Card design name represents the card design. You should input a card design name which
is unique to each company.

 Step 3) Select purpose of the card design. (Essential)

+ In the case of selecting 'For employee', you can design cards using card holder database.

+ In the case of selecting 'For visitor', you can design card using visitor database.

 Step 4) Select whether the card is one side or both sides. (Essential)

+ How to do with one side card : Tick one side mode to use one side card.

+ One side card is used when you design front of a card only. When printing, only the front
of a card is printed.

+ How to do with both sides card : Tick both sides mode to use both sides card. (In the case
of selecting label paper, one side mode only is activated.)

+ Both sides card is used when you design both front and back. When printing, front and
back both are printed.

+ In the case that a printer dose not support both sides print, you need to supply card or
paper manually.

 Step 5) Description : Input description of the card design. (Optional)

+ You can input freely up to 200 characters when you have something to record to the card
design information.

New card design - drawing button

301
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Screen description

 On the new card design screen, there are 6 drawing buttons and arrow button to select drawn
objects.

 Drawing buttons are buttons to create card design objects (line, rectangular, circle, text box, image
box, and 1 dimension bar code).

 How to use

Image Button name Button description How to use


1. Click the arrow button.
2. Select an area of objects to
select on the work space.
(Objects are selected only when
there are objects in the area that
is selected using arrow.)
Use this when selecting more than 1 objects on
the work space. (In the case of selecting just 1
Arrow ※ You can select or remove one or
object, you can select one directly without
more objects by clicking an
using arrow button.)
object with the arrow while
pressing [Ctrl] key.You can select
additional object using [Ctrl] key
after using the arrow button.
Also you can remove part of

302
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

selected objects.

1. Click the line button.


Use this when you draw a line on the work 2. Move mouse to the point to
Line
space. draw a line and draw the line
while clicking mouse.
1. Click the rectangular button.
Use this when you draw a rectangular on the 2. Move mouse to the point to
Rectangular
work space. draw a rectangular and draw the
rectangular while clicking mouse.
1. Click the circle button.
Use this when you draw a circle on the work 2. Move mouse to the point to
Circle
space. draw a circle and draw the circle
while clicking mouse.
1. Click the text box button.
Use this when you draw a text box on the work 2. Move mouse to the point to
Text box
space. draw a text box and draw the
text box while clicking mouse.
1. Click the image box button.
Use this when you draw a image box on the 2. Move mouse to the point to
Image box
work space. draw a image box and draw the
image box while clicking mouse.
1. Click the 1 dimensional bar code
button.
1 Dimensional Use this when you draw an 1 dimensional bar 2. Move mouse to the point to
bar code code on the work space. draw an 1 dimensional bar code
and draw the 1 dimensional bar
code while clicking mouse.
New card design - property window

 Screen description

 New card design property window consists of 2 parts.

 [Object property window] is to set property of objects which are used for a card design.

 Objects is line, rectangular, circle, text box, image box and 1 dimensional bar code which are used
for card design.

 [Card property window] is to set property of work space in which you design card on [New card
design].

 Also, you can set help feature for card design.

 Work space is a card or paper to print card.

 Help feature is setting guide line/grid and setting work space.

 -How to use [Object property window]

303
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Line property : This appears when you select a line drawn on the work space.

Group name Property name Property description How to set

Shows x-coordinate of start


point of the line.

Start point is a point that is


close to the left top of the
x-coordinate of start point work space. You cannot input.

X-coordinate of start point


is the distance from left
edge of the work space to
the start point.
Location
Shows y-coordinate of start
point of the line.

Start point is a point that is


close to the left top of the
y-coordinate of start point work space. You cannot input.

Y-coordinate of start point


is the distance from top
edge of the work space to
the start point.

304
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

Shows x-coordinate of end


point of the line.

End point is a point that is


close to the right bottom
x-coordinate of end point of the work space. You cannot input.

X-coordinate of end point


is the distance from left
edge of the work space to
the end point.

Shows y-coordinate of end


point of the line.

End point is a point that is


close to the right bottom
y-coordinate of end point of the work space. You cannot input.

y-coordinate of end point


is the distance from top
edge of the work space to
the end point.

Width field of a line is


Width You cannot input.
deactivated.

Height field of a line is


Height You cannot input.
deactivated.

You can select style of a


line.

Solid line, broken line,


Style Select style for a line.
boxed broken line, and
long broken line are
provided.

You can set thickness of a


Line
line. Use button of input field
Thickness You can select thickness or input an integer

from minimum 1 to directly.

maximum 40.

Click [ ].
Color You can set color of a line.
Select a color you want
from the color table.

305
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

(Click [Make user


definition color] and you
can choose various
colors.)

Click [Ok].

 Rectangular property : This appears when you select a rectangular drawn on the work space.

Group Property Property description How to set


name name

Shows x-coordinate of start point of the


rectangular.
x-coordinate
Start point is a point that is close to the left top
of start You cannot input.
of the work space.
point
Location X-coordinate of start point is the distance from
left edge of the work space to the start point.

y-coordinate Shows y-coordinate of start point of the line.

of start Start point is a point that is close to the left top You cannot input.
point of the work space.

306
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

Y-coordinate of start point is the distance from


top edge of the work space to the start point.

Shows x-coordinate of end point of the


rectangular.

x-coordinate End point is a point that is close to the right


You cannot input.
of end point bottom of the work space.

X-coordinate of end point is the distance from


left edge of the work space to the end point.

Shows y-coordinate of end point of the


rectangular.

y-coordinate End point is a point that is close to the right


You cannot input.
of end point bottom of the work space.

y-coordinate of end point is the distance from


top edge of the work space to the end point.

Shows width of the rectangular, and you can


Width Input an integer.
change width of the selected rectangular.

Shows height of the rectangular, and you can


Height Input an integer.
change height of the selected rectangular.

You can select boundary style of a rectangular.

Style Solid line, broken line, boxed broken line, and Select style for a line.

long broken line are provided.

You can set thickness of a boundary line of a


rectangular. Use button of input field or input an
Thickness
You can select thickness from minimum 1 to integer directly.

Line maximum 40.

Click [ ].

Select a color you want from the


You can set color of a boundary line of a color table. (Click [Make user
Color
rectangular. definition color] and you can choose
various colors.)

Click [Ok].

Click [ ].
Fill Color You can set color of a rectangular.
Select a color you want from the
color table. (Click [Make user

307
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

definition color] and you can choose


various colors.)

Click [Ok].

 Circle property : This appears when you select a circle drawn on the work space.

Group Property Property description How to set


name name

Shows x-coordinate of start point of the circle.

x-coordinate Start point is a point that is close to the left top


of start of the work space. You cannot input.
point
X-coordinate of start point is the distance from
left edge of the work space to the start point.
Location
Shows y-coordinate of start point of the line.

y-coordinate Start point is a point that is close to the left top


of start of the work space. You cannot input.
point
Y-coordinate of start point is the distance from
top edge of the work space to the start point.

308
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

Shows x-coordinate of end point of the


rectangular.

x-coordinate End point is a point that is close to the right


You cannot input.
of end point bottom of the work space.

X-coordinate of end point is the distance from


left edge of the work space to the end point.

Shows y-coordinate of end point of the line.

End point is a point that is close to the right


y-coordinate
bottom of the work space. You cannot input.
of end point
Y-coordinate of end point is the distance from
top edge of the work space to the end point.

Shows width of the circle, and you can change


Width Input an integer.
width of the selected circle.

Shows height of the circle, and you can change


Height Input an integer.
height of the selected circle.

You can select boundary style of a circle.

Style Solid line, broken line, boxed broken line, and Select style for a line.

long broken line are provided.

You can set thickness of a boundary line of a


circle. Use button of input field or input an
Thickness
You can select thickness from minimum 1 to integer directly.

Line maximum 40.

Click [ ].

Select a color you want from the


color table. (Click [Make user
Color You can set color of a boundary line of a circle.
definition color] and you can choose
various colors.)

3. Click [Ok].

Click [ ].

Select a color you want from the


color table. (Click [Make user
Fill Color You can set color of a circle.
definition color] and you can choose
various colors.)

Click [Ok].

309
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Text box property : This appears when you select a text box drawn on the work space.

Group name Property name Property description How to set

Shows x-coordinate of start


point of the text box.

Start point is a point that is


close to the left top of the
x-coordinate of start point work space. You cannot input.

X-coordinate of start point


is the distance from left
edge of the work space to
Location
the start point.

Shows y-coordinate of start


point of the text box.

Start point is a point that is


y-coordinate of start point close to the left top of the You cannot input.

work space.

Y-coordinate of start point


is the distance from top

310
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

edge of the work space to


the start point.

Shows x-coordinate of end


point of the text box.

End point is a point that is


close to the right bottom of
x-coordinate of end point the work space. You cannot input.

X-coordinate of end point is


the distance from left edge
of the work space to the
end point.

Shows y-coordinate of start


point of the text box.

End point is a point that is


close to the right bottom of
y-coordinate of end point the work space. You cannot input.

y-coordinate of end point is


the distance from top edge
of the work space to the
end point.

Shows width of the text box,


Width and you can change width Input an integer.
of the selected text box.

Shows height of the text


box, and you can change
Height Input an integer.
height of the selected text
box.

You can set font type for


text in the text box.

Font type You can select font types Select a font.

from font types saved in


your computer.
Font style

You can set font size for


Use button of input field
text in the text box.
Size or input an integer
You can select size from
directly.
minimum 1 to maximum 40.

311
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

Click [ ].

Select a color you want


from the color table.
You can set font color for (Click [Make user
Color
text in the text box. definition color] and you
can choose various
colors.)

Click [Ok].

Select [B], and the font

You can set font style for becomes bold.

text in the text box. Select [I], and the font


Style
Bold, italic, and underline becomes italic.

are provided. Select [U], and the font


becomes underlined.

Click [ ].

Select a color you want


from the color table.
You can set color of a text (Click [Make user
Fill Color
box. definition color] and you
can choose various
colors.)

Click [Ok].

You can input contents of


the text box.
Tick user definition.
You can input up to 500
Input contents in input
User definition characters.
field under the user
(If you have selected
definition.
employee or visitor data,
the selected items is reset.)

Contents
You can set data in card
holder database as contents
Tick employee data.
of a text box.
Employee Select a column name to
To use this, you have set
use from the combo box
Data purpose to 'for employee'
beside the employee
from basic setting.
data.
(If you have selected user
definition, the selected

312
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

items is reset.)

You can set data in visitor


database as contents of a
text box.
Tick visitor data.
To use this, you have set
Select a column name to
Visitor data purpose to 'for visitor' from
use from the combo box
basic setting.
beside the visitor data.
(If you have selected user
definition, the selected
items is reset.)

Select [ ], and text is


aligned to the left.
You can set horizontal
Select [ ], and text is
Width location of text in the text
aligned to the center.
box.
Select [ ], and text is
aligned to the right.
Text alignment
Select [ ], and text is
aligned to the top.

You can set vertical location Select [ ], and text is


Height
of text in the text box. aligned to the center.

Select [ ], and text is


aligned to the bottom.

 Image box property : This appears when you select an image box drawn on the work space.

313
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

Group Property Property description How to set


name name

Shows x-coordinate of start point of the image


box.
x-coordinate
Start point is a point that is close to the left top
of start You cannot input.
of the work space.
point
X-coordinate of start point is the distance from
left edge of the work space to the start point.

Shows x-coordinate of start point of the image


Location
box.
y-coordinate
Start point is a point that is close to the left top
of start You cannot input.
of the work space.
point
y-coordinate of start point is the distance from
top edge of the work space to the start point.

x-coordinate Shows x-coordinate of end point of the image


You cannot input.
of end point box.

314
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

End point is a point that is close to the right


bottom of the work space.

X-coordinate of end point is the distance from


left edge of the work space to the end point.

Shows y-coordinate of start point of the text


box.

y-coordinate End point is a point that is close to the right


You cannot input.
of end point bottom of the work space.

y-coordinate of end point is the distance from


top edge of the work space to the end point.

Shows width of the image box, and you can


Width Input an integer.
change width of the selected image box.

Shows height of the image box, and you can


Height Input an integer.
change height of the selected image box.

You can open an image in your computer and


1. Tick local.
input the image in the image box.
2. Click [ ].
You can use only an image of size less than
3. Select an image file saved in your
500kb.
computer.
(If you have selected employee or visitor data,
4. Click [Open].
the selected items is reset.)
Local
1. Click [Capture photo].

You can input image into image box using Web 2. When the capture window is
cam. activated, adjust web cam to see an

(To do this, an web cam have to be installed in object to capture.

Image your computer.) 3. Once an object is selected, click


[capture].

You can set image in card holder database as


contents of a image box. Tick employee data.
Employee To use this, you have set purpose to 'for Select a column name to use from
Data employee' from basic setting. the combo box beside the employee

(If you have selected local, the selected items is data.

reset.)

You can set image in visitor database as Tick visitor data.


Visitor
contents of a image box.
Select a column name to use from
Data
To use this, you have set purpose to 'for visitor' the combo box beside the visitor

315
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

from basic setting. data.

(If you have selected local, the selected items is


reset.)

 1 Dimensional bar code property : This appears when you select an 1 Dimensional bar code drawn
on the work space.

+ - Legibility is proportional to size of a bar code, but inversely proportional to data inputted.
In other words, to enhance legibility of a bar code, do not make the bar code too small
when you design a card. Also, if there are too much data, it is recommended to use text
box rather than bar code. (If there is too much data, legibility of a bar code may be
reduced.)

+ - If you have used 1 Dimensional bar code for your card design, please print it on the
normal paper and test legibility using bar code reader before issue cards. (Some bar code
readers distort some data(special character and English character(lower case) when scanning
bar codes.It is recommended to use English(upper case) and number when creating bar
codes.)

Group name Property name Property description How to set

Location x-coordinate of start point Shows x-coordinate of start You cannot input.

316
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

point of the 1 Dimensional bar


code.

Start point is a point that is


close to the left top of the
work space.

X-coordinate of start point is


the distance from left edge of
the work space to the start
point.

Shows y-coordinate of bar


code start point, and you can
change coordinate of the
selected 1 Dimensional bar
code .

Start point is a point that is


y-coordinate of start point You cannot input.
close to the left top of the
work space.

y-coordinate of start point is


the distance from top edge of
the work space to the start
point.

Shows x-coordinate of end


point of the 1 Dimensional bar
code.

End point is a point that is


close to the right bottom of
x-coordinate of end point You cannot input.
the work space.

X-coordinate of end point is


the distance from left edge of
the work space to the end
point.

Shows y-coordinate of end


point of the 1 Dimensional bar
code.

End point is a point that is


y-coordinate of end point You cannot input.
close to the right bottom of
the work space.

y-coordinate of end point is


the distance from top edge of

317
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

the work space to the end


point.

Shows width of the 1


Dimensional bar code, and
Width you can change width of the Input an integer.
selected 1 Dimensional bar
code .

Shows height of the 1


Dimensional bar code, and
Height you can change height of the Input an integer.
selected 1 Dimensional bar
code .

You can set bar code style for


Select a bar code style.
the 1 Dimensional bar code.
Check Digits of Code 39
Style Once you select 1 Dimensional
does not included in the
bar code, 1 Dimensional bar
bar code.)
code style appears.

Click [ ].
Bar code
Select a color you want
from the color table.
You can set color of an 1 (Click [Make user
Color
Dimensional bar code. definition color] and you
can choose various
colors.)

Click [Ok].

You can input contents of the


1 Dimensional bar code.

You can input up to 500


characters. Tick user definition.

(It is recommended to use less Input contents in input


User definition
than 20 characters, and a bar field under the user
Contents definition.
code that consists of special
characters only may not be
recognized by bar code
readers.) .

Employee Tick employee data.


You can set data in card
Data holder database as contents Select a column name to

318
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

of an 1 Dimensional bar code. use from the combo box


beside the employee
To use this, you have set
data.
purpose to 'for employee'
from basic setting.

You can set data in visitor


database as contents of an 1 Tick visitor data.
Dimensional bar code.
Select a column name to
Visitor data
To use this, you have set use from the combo box
purpose to 'for visitor' from beside the visitor data.
basic setting.

 How to use [Card property window]

 It appears when you click the work space.

Group name Property name Property description How to set

1. Tick plastic card.


Use this when you use
Size Plastic card. 2. Select a plastic card to
plastic cards.
use.

319
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

Use this when you use


label paper.
1. Tick label paper.
Label paper In the case of using label
2. Select label paper to use.
paper, only one side mode
is supported.

1. Tick user definition.


Use this when you want to
User definition 2. Input integer for width
use your own size.
and height.

1. Click work space of front,


and "front background
setting" text appear.
Select screen Show selected card screen.
2. Click work space of back,
and "back background
setting" text appear.

1. Tick background color.

Use this when you input 2 . Click [ ].


Background color
card background color. 3. Select a color you want.

4 . Click OK.

1. Tick image.
Card background
2. Click [ ].
color/image
3. Referring to how to use
[Image editor], set
background image.

4. After setting background


Use this when you input image, you can set
Image
card background image. brightness, contrast,
chroma, and transparency.

(Track bar value


ofbrightness, contrast,
chroma and transparency
increases by 10. To move
by 1, input into input field
beside the track bar.)

Use this when you want to


To use guide line, tick use.
Guide line / grid Guide line see guide line.
(The default value : Unused)
(Guide line does not

320
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

printed when printing.)

Use this when you want to To use grid, tick use. (The
Grid
be assisted by grid. default value : Use)

Select unit.
Set space between grid
Unit (provided unit : Pixel, Inch,
and guide lines.
Cm)

Shows standard of unit Standard of unit used for


Unit conversion table
conversion of card design. card design.

1. To see front of work


screen only, tick front.

2. To see back of work


screen only, tick back. (It is
possible only when you
have selected both sides
Set work screen that mode for 'select both sides
Work screen Select work screen
appears on the screen. of card'.)

3. To see both side of work


screen, tick both sides. (It is
possible only when you
have selected both sides
mode for 'select both sides
of card'.)

 Table of supported plastic cards and label papers.

(Unit : Pixel)

Paper
Type Name Width Height
orientation

CR-80 330 208 Width

Plastic CR-79 329 204 Width

Card CR-80(V) 208 330 Height

CR-79(V) 204 329 Height

Avery 2940 ID Badge Labels 336 216 Width

Label
Avery 2944 ID Badge Inserts 288 384 Height
Paper

Avery 2946 Laminated ID Badges 318 198 Width

321
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

Avery 2947 Fold & Clip ID Badges 336 216 Width

Avery 2949 Fold & Clip ID Badges 372 282 Width

Avery 2960 Thermal ID Badges 204 336 Height

Avery 2961 Thermal Fold & Clip ID Badges 336 204 Width

Avery 2962 Thermal Fold & ClipID Badges 204 336 Height

Avery 2990 Labels for Access Control Cards 323 203 Width

Avery5095 Self Adhesive Name Badges 282 182 Width

Avery 5140 Print or Write Name Badge Labels 324 225 Width

Avery 5384 Clip Style Name Badges 384 288 Width

Avery 5883 Pin Style Name Badges 306 177 Width

Avery 74461 Clip Style Name Badges 336 213 Width

Avery74551 Pin Style Name Badges 360 237 Width

Avery 74552 Pin Style Name Badges 288 189 Width

Avery 8395 Self Adhesive Name Badges 324 224 Width

 How to use [Image editor]

+
 Use original image.

+ Click [Apply] button that is at right bottom of [Image editor].

 Select a part of an image

 Step 1) On an image at the left of the [Image editor], create rectangular area to use as an card

322
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

background image using mouse.

 Step 2) The image of selected area is displayed at top right of [Image editor].

 Change selected area of an image

 Step 1) On an image at the left of the [Image editor], create rectangular area to use as an card
background image using mouse.

 Step 2) Pressing a box at the corner of the created rectangular area, move mouse to recreate an
area.

 Step 3) The image of selected area is displayed at top right of [Image editor].

 Image scale up/down

+ Use buttons beside the scale up/down input field of [image editor], or input an integer
directly. (Minimum : -10, Maximum : 10)

 Image rotation

+ Use buttons beside the rotation input field of [image editor], or input an integer directly.
(Minimum : 0, Maximum : 360)

 Image reset

+ Click [Image edit reset], and the image goes back to original one.

 Save edited image into a computer

+ Edited image is the one that is selected part of an original, extended/reduced, or rotated.

 Step 1) Edit an image using [Image editor].

 Step 2) Click [Save] button at the right bottom of [Image editor].

+
+ <Save confirmation window that appears when you click [Save] button>

 Step 3) On the save confirmation window, click [Yes] button.

323
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

+
+ <File save window that appears when you click [Yes] button on the save confirmation
window.>

 Step 4) File save window appears.

 Step 5) Input a file name to save and select a file format.

 Step 6) Click [Save] and the edited image is saved into your computer.

 Apply the edited image to card background image.

 Step 1) Edit an image using [Image editor].

 Step 2) Once you have done editing, click [Apply] button at the right bottom.

 How to use property window docking feature

 Step 1) Move as clicking property window, then direction table appears at the center.

 Step 2) Move mouse to center direction table, than property window moves. (Only moving to left
and right is possible.)

324
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

New card design - DB navigator

325
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Screen description

 DB navigator feature provide you to preview cards before printing using search user, previous [ ]
button and next [ ] button in the case that you have used data for employee and visitor for card
design objects.

 DB navigator provides search user, previous [ ] button, and [ ] button.

 This is possible only when there are objects for which you have used data for employee or visitor.

 How to use search user.

 Step 1) Select search condition. Search conditions are appears as follows based on card purpose.

Type Search condition

Name

For employee Employee number

Card number

Visitor name

For visitor Personal ID

E-mail

 Step 2) Input search terms.

 Step 3) Click the [search] button.

 When there is a user who matches search word, the number of found users are displayed beside
[search] button.

 (For example, In the case of 1/23, among 23 users, the 1st user's information is displayed on the
work screen.)

 How to use previous and next button

 Click previous [ ] button and the previous user's information is displayed on the work screen.

 Click next [ ] button and the next user's information is displayed on the work screen.

New card design - edit button

326
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Screen description

 Cut, copy, paste, undo, redo, align left, align center, align right, reduce, extend, go to top, and go to
bottom are provided.

 How to use : Click button and you can use edit features as follows.

Button name How to use

You can cut 1 object. Click Paste[ ] and you can create a specific object many times.

Cut [ ] button Step 1) Choose an object to cut.

Step 2) Click cut[ ] button or press a hotkeys ([Ctrl]+[x]).

You can copy 1 object. Click Paste[ ] and you can create a specific object many times.

Copy [ ] button Step 1) Select an object to copy.

Step 2) Click copy[ ] button or press hotkeys ([Ctrl]+[c]).

You can create several objects that you have copied or cut.

7Paste[ ] button Step 1) Execute cut or copy first.

Step 2) Click paste[ ] button or press hotkeys ([Ctrl]+[v]).

Undo [ ] button You can use undo function.

327
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

Undo rolls back work to the previous step.

Step 1)Click undo[ ] button.

You can use redo function.

Redo[ ] button Redo is opposite to undo.

Step 1) Click redo[ ] button.

In the case of selecting several objects, you can align them to the left based on the
selected object. (You can select several objects using arrow button.)
Left align[ ] button
Step 1) Select several objects.

Step 2) Click Left Align[ ].

In the case of selecting several objects, you can align them to the center based on the
selected object. (You can select several objects using arrow button.)
Center align [ ] button
Step 1) Select several objects.

Step 2) Click center align [ ] button.

In the case of selecting several objects, you can align them to the right based on the
selected object. (You can select several objects using arrow button.)
Right align [ ] button
Step 1) Select several objects.

Step 2) Click right align [ ] button.

Shows the work screen reduced by 25% each. (Minimum : 25%)


Reduce[ ] button
Step 1) Click reduce [ ] button.

Shows work screen extended by 25% each. (Maximum : 200 %)


Extend [ ] button
Step 1) Click extend[ ] button.

Click an object and click the button, then the selected object moves to the top of all the
other designed objects.
To the top [ ] button
Step 1)Select an object to move to the top.

Step 2) Click right to the top [ ] button.

Click an object and click the button, then the selected object moves to the bottom of all
the other designed objects.
To the bottom [ ]
button Step 1) Select an object to move to the bottom.

Step 2) Click to the bottom [ ] button.

New card design - print button

328
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Screen description

 Click print button on the new card design screen, and you can print card design which is being
displayed on the new card design right away.

 How to use :

 Step 1) Click print[ ] button.

 Step 2) If a card design has changed or it is a newly created card design (which has not been saved
card design), the message box appears as follows.


 Step 3) Click the [Yes] button. (In the case that it is a saved card design, this box does not appears.)

 Step 4) In the case of employee card, [Staff card print] appears and in the case of visitor card,
[visitor card print] screen appears. (Refer to [Staff card print] and [Visitor card print].)

New card design - coordinate

329
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Screen description

 Shows location of mouse cursor on the work screen.

 ex) Front side present coordinates (198,100) : Mouse cursor is located at x coordinate 189 and y
coordinate 100 on the front work screen.

New card design - toolbar features description

330
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 How to use

 Card design search

+ Method 1) Select from the combo box beside the quick find directly.

+ Method 2) Click previous [ ] or next [ ] buttons and find a card design you want.

+ Method 3) Click Search [ ] button and move to [card design search] screen to find a card
design you want.

 How to use [card design search] screen

 Clicking card design search of card design tab among menus on the left of the main screen or

'Search' [ ] button of at the top toolbar of the registration screen displays a screen as follows.


 Step 1) Select a company name. (Optional)

 Step 2) Input the card design name. (Optional)

 Step 3) Select the purpose. (Optional)

 Step 4) If you have input any of those 3, search results that match the condition appear.

 If you have not input any of those 3 and click [Search] button, all card design appears.

 As a search result, you can see basic setting information and card size of each card design.

331
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Step 5) Click [search] and search screen card design is displayed.

 Step 6) You can select a card design using check box on the row of search screen.

 Step 7-1) After selecting check box, click modify [ ] button, then the selected card design
information is displayed on the new card design screen. You can modify or delete the card design
that is displayed on the new card design screen on the card design screen.

 Step 7-2)After selecting check box, click delete [ ], then the selected card design is deleted.

 Create new card design

 Step 1) Click new [ ] button and the message box appears as follows.

+
 Step 2) Click [yes] and [new card design] screen is reset.

 Save card design

 Step 1) Input all the essential input items into the basic information of card design. (Essential items :
Company name, card design name, purpose and card both sides selection)

 Step 2) On the toolbar, click the save [ ] button. (Card design is saved basically after inputting
essential input items of step 1.)

 Modify card design

 Step 1) Search saved card designs.

 Step 2) Load the found card design into [new card design] screen.

 Step 3) Modify the loaded card design and click save[ ].

 Delete card design

 Step 1) Search saved card designs.

 Step 2) Load the found card design into [new card design] screen.

 Step 3) Click delete [ ] button and the message box appears as follows.

332
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Step 4) Click [yes] button and the registered card design is deleted.

 Card design help search

 Click help [ ] button at the top toolbar and help about new card design screen appears.

333
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

13.3 Card Design Print

13.3.1 Staff Card Print

Explains [Staff card print] in which you can print cards that are designed for employee from [New card design].
In the case of a card including a bar code, print the card on the normal paper before printing card and test legibility
by bar code readers.
In the case of card design which is designed for label paper, print the card on the normal paper before printing on
the label paper and check printing status.

Staff card print - card design print information

334
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Screen description

 On this screen, you can set card design print information.

 Card design print information is basic information that is needed to print card design.

 You have to input company name, card design name, and printer to activate [print] button.

 Select the print orientation, vertical or horizontal.

 In the case of using object that is connected to DB (Text box, image box, 1 dimensional bar code),
you have to select users to print to activate [print] button.

 How to use screen

 Step 1)Select a company name of card design to print. (Essential)

 Step 2) Select a card design name to print. (Essential)

 In the case of [staff card print], on card design names of which purpose is for employee appear.

 Step 3) Select a printer to print staff cards. (Essential)

 Only printers that are connected to your computer are displayed in to printer combo box.

Staff card print - Search users to print

335
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Screen description

 On this screen, you can search users to print and select users to print.

 In the case of using object that is connected to DB (Text box, image box, 1 dimensional bar code),
you have to select users to print to activate [print] button.

 In the case of selected users to print, after printing, the number of issue increases on users to print
card search results.

 Click [search] button and you can select all or remove all using [Select all] and [Remove all] button.

 How to use screen

 Step 1) Check company name of users to print.

+ Company name is same with the company name that is selected from [Card design print
information].

 Step 2) You can select users to print by clicking [ ] button. (Optional)

 Step 3) Input employee ID of an employee to find. (Employee ID is an unique number that is used
when registering a card holder.) (Optional)

 Step 4) Select search conditions (department name/position name/job title name) and input
appropriate search word. (Optional)

 Step 5) Click the [search] button. In the case that not inputting any of employee name, employee ID,
department name/position name/job title name, all the employees of the selected company you
have chosen from [card design print information] is displayed on the search result.

 Step 6) Select users to print among employees in the search result and you can print a card of the

336
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

corresponding employee.

Staff card print - print button

 Screen description

 Click [Print] button and [Print window] is activated as follows.

 In the case of selecting users to print, after printing, the number of issue increases on users to print
card search results.

 The time of activation of [print] button varies depend of whether DB connected objects (Text box,
image box and 1 dimensional bar code) are used in card design or not.

 The time of activation of [print] button

 In the case of card design which is not using DB connected objects(Text box, image box and 1
dimensional bar code), the button is activated when [Card design print information] setting is completed.

 In the case of using object that is connected to DB (Text box, image box, 1 dimensional bar code), you
have to select users to print through [Search users to print] after setting [card design print information]
to activate [print] button.

 How to use screen

 Printing method

 Step 1) Click [Print] button and [Print window] is activated as follows.

337
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD


 Step 2) If you print to a file type, type the path and file name where you want to save the file, and then
click the [Save] button.

338
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

13.3.2 Visitor Card Print

Explains [Visitor card print] in which you can print cards that are designed for visitor from [New card design].
In the case of a card including a bar code, print the card on the normal paper before printing card and test legibility
by bar code readers.
In the case of card design which is designed for label paper, print the card on the normal paper before printing on
the label paper and check printing status.

Visitor card print - card design print information

339
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Screen description

 On this screen, you can set card design print information.

 Card design print information is basic information that is needed to print card design.

 You have to input company name, card design name, and printer to activate [print] button.

 In the case of using object that is connected to DB (Text box, image box, 1 dimensional bar code),
you have to select users to print to activate [print] button.

 How to use screen

 Step 1)Select a company name of card design to print. (Essential)

+ Company name for [Visitor card print] is a name of a company that a visitor has visited. In
other words, a company that issues a card to a visitor.

 Step 2) Select a card design name to print. (Essential)

+ In the case of [visitor card print], on card design names of which purpose is for visitor
appear.

 Step 3) Select a printer to print visitor cards. (Essential)

+ Only printers that are connected to your computer are displayed in to printer combo box.

Visitor card print - Search users to print

 Screen description

 On this screen, you can search users to print and select users to print.

340
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 In the case of using object that is connected to DB (Text box, image box, 1 dimensional bar code),
you have to select users to print to activate [print] button.

 Click [search] button and you can select all or remove all using [Select all] and [Remove all] button.

 How to use screen

 Step 1) Select a company name of a visitor to print. (Optional)

+ Company name is a name of a visitor's company.

 Step 2) Input visitor name to print a card. (Optional)

 Step 3) Input cell phone number of a visitor to print a card. (Optional)

 Step 4) Input email address of a visitor to print a card. (Optional)

 Step 5) Click the [search] button. In the case that not inputting any of visitor's company, visitor'
name, cell phone number and email address, all the visitors of the company you have registered
from [card design print information] is displayed on the search result.

 Step 6) Select users to print among visitors in the search result and you can print a card of the
corresponding visitor.

Visitor card print - print button

 Screen description

 Click [Print] button and [Print window] is activated as follows.

 The time of activation of [print] button varies depend of whether DB connected objects (Text box,
image box and 1 dimensional bar code) are used in card design or not.

 The time of activation of [print] button

341
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 In the case of card design which is not using DB connected objects(Text box, image box and 1
dimensional bar code), the button is activated when [Card design print information] setting is completed.

 In the case of using object that is connected to DB (Text box, image box, 1 dimensional bar code), you
have to select users to print through [Search users to print] after setting [card design print information]
to activate [print] button.

 How to use screen

 Printing method

 Step 1) Click [Print] button and [Print window] is activated as follows.


 Step 2) If you print to a file type, type the path and file name where you want to save the file, and
then click the [Save] button.

342
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

13.4 Card Publish Count Set

13.4.1 Card Publish Count Set

The number of issued cards setting

 Screen description

 On this screen, you can set the number of card issues and reset card issue information.

 Card Publish Count Set is setting maximum number of card issues for employees of a company.

 Reset card issue information is resetting information of card print of employees.

 How to use

 How to use Card Publish Count Set

343
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Step 1) Tick Set the number of times of card issue

 Step 2) Select a company name in the set the number of times of card issue.

 Step 3) Input the number of card issue to set.

 Step 4) Click [Apply] button.

 Step 5) To check the existing number of card issue, select a company name from a search field of
Reset card issue information, click search, and check the number of limitation on the search result.

 How to use reset card issue information

 Step 1) Tick Reset card issue information.

344
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Step 2) Select a company of users to reset from reset card issue information. (Optional)

 Step 3) Input employee ID of users to reset from reset card issue information. (Optional)

 Step 4) On reset card issue information, select users to reset from [employee search] below by
clicking [ ] button, and click [ok]. (Optional)

 Step 5) On reset card issue information, select department name/position name/title name of users
to reset and Input search words that are appropriate for conditions. (Optional)

 Step 6) Click the [search] button. If you do not input search conditions of step2 ~ 5, all the
employees are found.

 Step 7) Check users to reset among employees on the search result.

+ You can select all/remove all using select all/remove all buttons.

 Step 8) Click [reset] button and the number of card issue of the selected employees is reset.

 Step 9) Check the search result. The number of card issue is changed to "0". (Reset succeeded)

345
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

13.5 Credit Card Report

13.5.1 Some User Report

Individual card report

 Screen description

 Some user report provide card issue history that employees have printed in a report form based on
persons, and you can export or print.

 How to use

 Step 1) Input employee ID to display on the report. (Optional)

 Step 2) Select a card design name. (Optional)

 Step 3) Click [ ] button beside employee name, select employees from [search employee] below,
and click [ok] button. (option (Optional)

346
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Step 4) Input date of print. Date of print is when the card is issued. (Optional)

 Step 5) Select type (all, print breakdown, reset breakdown).(Optional)

+ In the case of selecting all, all the print and reset history is displayed on the report.

+ In the case of selecting print break down, only the print history is displayed on the report.

+ In the case of selecting reset break down, only the reset history is displayed on the report.

 Step 6) Select sort type. (Optional)

+ Sort type is order of data display when printing report.

+ There are employee number, employee name, company name, and department name for
sort type.

 Step 7) Select sort order. (Optional)

+ Sort order is to select whether the sort type is displayed in ascending order or descending
order.

 Step 8) After selecting search conditions and sort type/sort order from step 1 ~7, click [ ] button
on the toolbar. If you do not select search conditions and sort type/sort order from step 1 ~7,
report for all the employees are displayed on the report preview.

347
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Step 9-1) To print report preview screen, click print button on the report preview toolbar.

 Step 9-2) To export preview screen into a file of a form you want, click 'export' button of report
preview toolbar. (In the case of exporting as TIF, horizontal report is created into TIF image after
being rotated 90 degrees.)

348
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

13.5.2 Card Status Report

Card status report

 Screen description

 Card status report provide card issue history that employees have printed in a report form based on
company, department, position and title, and you can export or print.

 How to use

 Step 1) Select company name to display on the report. (Optional)

 Step 2) Select a card design name. (Optional)

 Step 3) Select search conditions (all, department name, position name, and title name) and input
appropriate search word for the search conditions.

 Step 4) Input date of print. Date of print is when the card is issued. (Optional)

 Step 5) Select sort type. (Optional)

+ Sort type is order of data display when printing report.

+ There is a company for the sort type.

 Step 6) Select sort order. (Optional)

+ Sort order is to select whether the sort type is displayed in ascending order or descending

349
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

order.

 Step 7) After selecting search conditions and sort type/sort order from step 1 ~ 6, click [ ] button
on the toolbar. If you do not select search conditions and sort order from step 1 ~ 6, report for all
the employees are displayed on the report preview.

 Step 8-1) To print report preview screen, click print button on the report preview toolbar.

 Step 8-2) To export preview screen into a file of a form you want, click 'export' button of report
preview toolbar. (In the case of exporting as TIF, horizontal report is created into TIF image after
being rotated 90 degrees.)

350
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

14. VISITOR MANAGEMENT

14.1 Visitor management

14.1.1 Visitor information management

In visitor management, you can register, modify, delete, communicate, and search information of visitors and visits.
Visitors can request a visit in advance and get the reservation information when visiting the site. You can use saved
visitor (visit) information as data when you control access, check, and print.

Connect communication device, scan devices, fingerprint devices, and signing device in advance to register visit
information smoothly.

 Screen description

Visitor information management - common

 In the case that company selection right above work menu is 'all', select a company to visit.(If a
company is selected from main window, a company to visit is deactivated and you cannot select it.)
Personal ID, visitor name and email must be inputted. (Input boxes and combo boxes that have color
are essential and you have to input and select them.)

 Reservation number is selectable when a visitor had reserved using web in advance and the receptionist
has approved the visit. (Caution :In the case that reservation number is selected and the reservation is

351
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

not approved, save button of the toolbar is deactivated and you cannot save it. In this case, click new
and register without selecting reservation number.)

 How to use screen

 Step 1) In the case that company selection right above work menu is 'all', select a company name to
visit. (essential) If a company is selected from main window, a company to visit is deactivated and
you cannot select it.If an employee is selected from the receptionist information below, company to
visit is deactivated and you cannot select it.

 Step 2) Input visitor name. (Essential)

 Step 3) Input personal ID. (Essential)

 Step 4) Input e-mail. (Essential) For visitors who have been chosen at quick find and visitor search,
visitor name, personal ID and email are deactivated and you cannot modify them.

 Step 5) Select reservation number in the case that there is an advance reservation via web for the
visit. Once you select reservation number, the program gets purpose of visit, start date of visit, end
date of visit, and receptionist information which are registered using web. (For advance reservation
via web, refer to web version visitor management manual.) In the case of selecting random
reservation number, when visit reservation status is wait and refused, save button is deactivated and
you cannot save it, only when the status is authorized, you can save it.

 Step 6) Click check in button about the time when a manager issues an actual card to visitor. Click
the button and the card information and visitor information which are inputted from card
information tab are transferred to server device of access control automatically. After successful
check-in, the button is deactivated. (Check in button is deactivated before saving visit information
and activated after inputting information to basic setting tab and card information tab normally.
After the check in, transfer button is activated on the toolbar which was deactivated.) Although
check in have been processed, you can still modify visitors and visit information.

 Step 7) Check out button is activated after executing check in button. When a visitor returns one's
card, click check button and the corresponding card number is deleted from a device and you can
issue the checked out card for other visitor.You cannot modify checked out information.

Visitor information management-basic settings

352
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Input basic information of visitor, select receptionist, and input visit information.

 For visitor classification, in the case that a visitor came from outside, select outer, and in the case that a
visitor visit to one's own company, select inner.

 For visitor type, type by company which is save from visitor type registration menu is displayed.(In
advance, visitor type by company should be registered.)

 You have to input cell phone number, company name, department name, position name, start date of
visit, and end date of visit(of which input field is colored)

 For receptionist, 'company to visit' should be selected, and you can select several people from pop up
window by clicking 'Search employee' button .

 In the case of having photo file, you can register photo using 'open' button on the left. In the case of
having capture device, you can take a photo in person and register it.

 How to use screen

 Step 1) Select visitor classification (outer, inner). (Essential)

 Step 2) Select visitor type. (Essential) Visitor type is type which is saved by company from visitor
type registration.

 Step 3) Input your mobile phone number. (Essential)

 Step 4) Input company name. (Essential)

 Step 5) Input the Department name. (Optional)

 Step 6) Input position name. (Optional)

 Step 7) Input title name. (Optional)

353
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Step 8) Input Start date of Visit. (Essential)

 Step 9) Input End date of visit. (Essential)

 Step 10) Input a purpose of visit. (Essential)

 Step 11) Input additional description if you need. (Optional)

 Step 12) On receptionist information, for search employee, select an employee clicking button.
(Essential)

 Search employees

+ Step 1) Check in front of employees who are receptionists and click 'ok'.

+ Step 2) Input employee name in employee name box and click search, then inputted
employee names are found from tree.

+ Step 3) Click 'clear' button and checkedmarksare removed.

+ Step 4)Click 'cancel' and the window disappears.

+ Step 5) Click 'ok' and checked employees are displayed on the employee input field of
basic information.

 Step 13) Click [Capture photo]. (Optional)

+ Step 1) Click capture photo and image to be captured is displayed on the pop up window.

+ Step 2) Adjust face to fit the screen and click capture button, then the window closes and
captured image is applied on the visitor (visit) registration window.

+ Step 3) Click open and find an image to register from the local PC.

354
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

+ Step 4) Click delete and it disappears from the screen.

Visitor information management - card information

 Input card information for visit. You can transfer inputted card information to access control devices.
Use card information when process check in and check out.

 How to use screen

 Step 1) Input card mode.(Essential) There are visitor, handicapped and normal user for card mode.
(Essential)

 Step 2) Input a card number. Card number consists of 8 or 10 digits number depending on card
type. (Essential)

 Step 3) Input a password. (Essential) Password is used when authentication mode is card + password,
input 4 digits number. Default password is 0000.

 Step 4) Access group : Access group is displayed depending on a company to visit. Select one of
access groups. Optional)

 Step 5) validity : Set whether to make validity.Check when you make valid start date and valid end
date. In the case of not checking date and time of validity, the card can be used until it is checked
out. (Essential)

 Step 6) Valid start date : It is activated when date and time of validity is checked. Input start date
and time of validity. (Essential)

 Step 7) Valid end date : It is activated when date and time of validity is checked. Input end date and
time of validity. After the end date, the card cannot be used. (Essential)

Visitor information management - detail information

355
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Input detailed information of a visitor. If you register visitor access control fingerprint, you can use it for
visitor access control.

 How to use screen

 Step1) Plate number : Input plate number. (Optional)

 Step2) Phone(Company) : Input company phone number. (Optional)

 Step 3) Input fax number. (Optional)

 Step4) Input company homepage. (Optional)

 Step 5) Input company address.(Optional)

 Step 6) Description : Input additional description if you need.(Optional)

 Step 7) Scan registration : Select name card, identification card, driver's license, and
signature.(Optional)

 How to register name card, identification card, and driver's license using scanner.

+ Step 1) Scanner devices should be installed.

+ Step 2) Select one of name card, identification card and driver's license.

+ Step 3) Click scan, then the program gets an image of name card, identification card or
driver's license on the scanner.

+ Step 4) Click open and find an image to register from the local PC. File size of an image to
be registered should be less than 100kb.

+ Step 5) Click delete and it is deleted.

 How to register signature

+ Step 1) Signature devices should be installed.

356
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

+ Step 2) Select signature among scan registrations.

+ Step 3) A pop up window which shows image of signature appears as follows.

+ Step 4) Click scan after sign, the signature is applied and appears on the screen.

 How to register visitor access control fingerprint

+ Step 1) Click capture button at the top right.

+ Step 2) Scan a fingerprint using installed scanner.

+ Step 3) Captured fingerprint appears on the screen. (The registered fingerprint is used for
visitor access control.)

Visitor information management - biometrics Management

 Register fingerprint for access. You can transfer fingerprint with card information to communication
server and access control device.

 How to use screen

 Step 1) On Fingerprint management using Hamster, register fingerprint using Hamster which is
specialized biometric recognition data registration device.

357
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Step 2) Click fingerprint registration and fingerprint registration window appears.

 Step 3) Capture fingerprint on fingerprint registration window and apply it.

 How to register fingerprint using fingerprint scanner (Hamster)

+ Step 1) When registering fingerprint using hamster, a window appears as above.

+ Step 2) Message is guide for finger print registration.

+ Step 3) On the figure box, scanned fingerprint is displayed.

+ Step 4) Quality shows quality of registered finger print.

+ Step 5) Select the number of fingerprint template ( 5 templates to the maximum for MAC
device)

+ When trasmitted with more than two templates registered, fingerprints registered first and
second will be used

+ Step 6) Click the button above the finger desired to be scanned

+ Step 7) Register the fingerprint when the light of Hamster is on.

+ Step 8) Apply : Apply fingerprint data.

+ Step 9) Click link to e-training center button, and an website pops up and you can see a
video about how to register fingerprint.

 Step 4) In the case of selecting fingerprint management using fingerprint reader, fingerprint
recognition reader selection list (FGR006, FINGER006, LX006, FGR006SR, FINGER006SR, LX006SR) is

358
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

activated.(Select a fingerprint recognition reader, and fingerprint registration button is activated.


Click fingerprint registration button and register fingerprint using the selected device.

 Step 5) Select receive fingerprint from specific fingerprint reader and fingerprint recognition reader
list (FGR006, FINGER006, LX006, FGR006SR, FINGER006SR, LX006SR) is activated. Select a fingerprint
recognition reader to receive fingerprint. Click receive fingerprint button and receive fingperprint
from the device. To receive fingerprint, card number of visitor information management and card
number of a device to receive fingerprint should be same and the card number of the matched
device should have fingerprint data.

 Step 6) Use biometric information : Select whether to use biometric information or not.

 Step 7) Biometrics data : Shows value of fingerprint information.

Visitor information management - User defined field

 In the case of needing additional visitor information, on tool>option>visitor option>user defined field,
input a label name and check whether to use or not. The label appears on the list. Input user defined
field value for each label.

 How to use screen

 Step 1) You can set on Tool>option>visitor option>user defined field menu

 Set Tool>option>visitor option>user defined field

+ Step 1) Click tool>option on the top menu.

+ Step 2) Select visitor option>user defined field on the left list.

359
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

+ Step 3) Check whether to use or not of items to use on the right, select field type, and
modify label name. Once you modify, 'apply' and 'ok' buttons at the bottom are activated.
Click 'apply' button and modified information is saved. Button is deactivated and screen
stays still. Click 'ok' and modified information is saved and the window disappears.

 Step 2) Input date in the user defined field value according to each label name user have defined.

Visitor information management - visitor history

 Shows visitor's visit history in a list. Select a visitor history, and 'delete' button is activated so you can
delete it.

 How to use screen

 Step 1) Tick a history to delete and the delete button is activated.

 Step 2) Click delete and the selected visit history disappears from the screen. Be cautious, deleting
card also deletes DB.

Visitor information management - toolbar feature description

360
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Visitor search

 Method 1) Select from the combo box beside the quick find directly.

 Method 2) Click previous [ ] or next [ ] buttons and find a visitor you want.

 Method 3) Click Search [ ] button and move to [visitor search] screen to find a visitor you want.

 How to use [visitor search] screen

 Clicking [search visitor] of [visitor management] tab among menus on the left of the main screen or

'Search' [ ] button of the toolbar on the top of the [visitor information management] displays a
screen as follows.

+ Step 1) Select a company name to visit. (Optional)

+ Step 2) Select visitor classification. (Optional)

+ Step 3) Input visitor name. (Optional)

+ Step 4) Input e-mail. (Optional)

+ Step 5) Input the company name. (Optional)

+ Step 6) If you have input any of those, search results that match the condition appear. If

361
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

you have not input any of those and click [Search] button, all visitors appear. On search
result, you can see the visitor's basic information.

+ Step 7) Click and visit history is displayed in the list below.

+ Step 8) You can select visitors using check box on the selection row of search screen.

+ Step 9-1) After selecting check box, click modify [ ] button, then the selected visitor
information is displayed on the visitor information management screen. For visitors on
visitor information management screen, you can register visit or delete the visitor on visitor
information management screen.

+ Step 9-2) After selecting check box, click delete [ ], then the selected visitor is deleted.

+ Step 9-3) When registering a visit information, double click visitor information and you can
move to visitor information management screen. Input new visit information and click save

[ ] button.

+ Step 9-4) When modifying a visit history, double click the visitor history and you can move
to visitor information management screen. Modify visit information on visitor information

management screen and click save[ ] button.

 Create new visitor(visit)

 Step 1) Click new [ ] button and the message box appears as follows.

 Step 2) Click [yes] and [visitor information management] screen is reset.

 Save visitor(visit)

 Step 1) Input all the essential items on basic setting and card information tabs of visitor information
management.

 Step 2) Click save[ ] button on the toolbar. (Visitor(visit) information is saved basically after
inputting essential input items.)

 Modify visitor(visit)

 Step 1) Click on the left of a visitor to modify on the search screen after clicking search button,
and visit history is displayed in the list below. Double click a visit history of the history list to modify.

 Step 2) Change each item and click 'Save' ( ) button.

 Step 3) After modifying information of the checked in card, save and click transfer < > button.

362
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Load visitor

 Step 1) Click search button and double click a visitor on the search screen.

 Step 2) The selected visitor is displayed on the visitor information management screen.

 Step 3) The loaded visitor's visitor type, name, and company to visit are deactivated.

 Visitor delete

 Method1) Delete on the search screen.

+ Step 1) Check selection column of the vistor to delete.

+ Step 2) Click delete [ ] button and the message box appears as follows.

+ Step 3) Click [yes] button and the registered visitor and visit history are deleted.

 Method2) Delete on the visitor registration screen

+ Step 1) Double click a visitor on the search screen.

+ Step 2) Load the double clicked visitor to [Visitor information management] screen.

+ Step 3) Click delete [ ] button and the message box appears as follows.

+ Step 4) Click [yes] button and the registered visitor and visit history are deleted.

 Transfer visitor(visit) information

 Step 1) You can select a visitor directly from the quick search combo box or use 'Previous' ( ) or

'Next' ( ) button to select.

 Step 2) Input each item and click 'Save' ( ) button at the top toolbar.

 Step 3) Click check-in button. (After check-in, the transmission is processed automatically.)

 Step 3) When the transfer < > button on the toolbar is activated, click it. . (If you have changed
data is transmitted and saved)

 Step 4) Visitor information and card information are transmitted to the device.

363
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

14.1.2 Visitor access management

 Screen description

 Based on search method, the program get checked in visitors and visitor information using reader for
card registration, bar code reader, fingerprint scanner and directly search, and process check out.

 In the case that execute visitor access management after closing visitor access management window,
search method that had been chosen before the window is closed is selected as search method
automatically. When there are more than 2 users that meet search conditions, the program shows you
visit information as a list ona pop up window.

 How to use screen

 Step 1) Select search method.

+ Select directly search as search method.

 Step 1) Select 'directly search' as a search method.

 Step 2) Select items to search.(Visitor name, e-mail, and cell phone number)

 Step 3) Input contents to search.

 Step 4) Click the search[ ] button.

364
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Select reader for card registration as search method.

 Step 1) Select reader for card registration as search method.

 Step 2) Scan a fingerprint using reader for card registration. Reader for card registration should have
been registered at tool>option>device>reader for card registration in advance.

 How to register [visitor search] reader for card registration.

 Step 1) Click tool>option on the top menu.

 Step 2) Select device>reader for card registration from list on the left.

 Step 3) Select communication port on the right screen.

 Step 4) Select polling speed.

 Step 5) Select parity.

 Step 6) Select data bit.

 Step 7) Select stop bit.

 Step 8) Once you modify, 'apply' and 'ok' buttons at the bottom are activated. Click 'apply' button
and modified information is saved. Button is deactivated and screen stays still. Click 'ok' and
modified information is saved and the window disappears.

 Select bar code reader as search method.

 Step 1) For 'Select Reader', select bar code reader.

365
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Step 2) Select a subject to scan (personal ID, cell phone, ...).

 Step 3) Scan bar code using bar code reader

 Select fingerprint scanner as search method.

 Step 1) For 'Select Reader', select fingerprint scanner.

 Step 2) Click capture button.

 Step 3) Register fingerprint on fingerprint scanner.

+ The fingerprint should be same with the fingerprint that is registered from visitor access
management.)

 Step 4) If there is information that is same with checked in visit information, the information of
visitor and visit is displayed on the screen.

 Step 5) Click check out button when it is activated. You can use the checked out card for another
visitor immediately.

+ In the case that search method is directly search and bar code reader, if there is information
of more than 2 users, visitor access search window appears as a pop up window. Double
click a visitor, and pop up window closes and visit information is displayed.

366
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

14.2 Web account management

14.2.1 Visitors Web account management

 Screen description

Visitor Web account management

 In the case of registering at visitor information management and web,Web account information is
displayed only for visitors who have joined web.

 How to use screen

 Step 1) Input the company name. (Essential items)

 Step 2) Input a department name. (Essential items)

 Step 3) Input position name. (Essential items)

 Step 4) Input title name. (Optional)

 Step 4) Input mobile phone number. (Essential items)

 Step 4) Id is same with e-mail.

 Step 5) Input a password. (Essential items)

Visitor web account management - toolbar feature description

 Search visitor account

 Method 1) Select from the combo box beside the quick find directly.

 Method 2) Click previous [ ] or next [ ] buttons and find a visitor you want.

 Method 3) Click Search [ ] button and move to [visitor account search] screen to find a visitor you
want.

367
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 How to use [Search visitor account] screen

 Clicking [search visitor account] of [visitor management] tab among menus on the left of the main

screen or 'Search' [ ] button of the toolbar on the top of the [visitor account management]
displays a screen as follows.

+ Step 1) Input visitor name. (Optional)

+ Step 2) Input your mobile phone number. (Optional)

+ Step 3) Input the company name. (Optional)

+ Step 4) Input e-mail. (Optional)

+ Step 5) If you have input any of those, search results that match the condition appear.

+ If you have not input any of those and click [Search] button, all visitors appear. On search
result, you can see the visitor's basic information.

+ Step 6) You can select visitors using check box on the selection row of search screen.

+ Step 7)After selecting check box, click modify [ ] button, then the selected visitor
information is displayed on the visitor web account management. Visitor information of
visitor on visitor web account management screen is modifiable on visitor web account
management screen. (Double click a visitor, and visitor web account management screen
appears.)

 Modify visitor account

+ Step 1) Search saved visitor.

+ Step 2) Input each item of an employee to modify and click save ( ) button on the
toolbar. (You can see the modified information on the visitor management by selecting the
visitor, and to find the visitor, you need to search using the modified information.)

368
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

14.2.2 Receptionist web account management

 Screen description

Employee web account management

 Manages employee information and employee account (web). Shows employee information based on
the information which is registered from card holder management. Only part of employee information
(cell phone number, e-mail, personal ID, and in the case of having joined web, password) can be
modified and you can search employee directly using search button on the toolbar.Web account
information is displayed only for employees who have joined web.

 How to use screen

 Step 1) Cell phone number Input your mobile phone number. (Essential)

 Step 2) E-mail : Modify e-mail.(Essential)

 Step 3) Input social ID. (Optional)

 Step 4) Id is same with e-mail.

 Step 5) Password : Modify password.

Employee web account management - toolbar feature description

 Search employee account

 Method 1) Select from the combo box beside the quick find directly.

 Method 2) Click previous [ ] or next [ ] buttons and find an employee you want.

 Method 3) Click Search [ ] button and move to [employee account search] screen to find an
employee you want.

369
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 How to use [Search employee account] screen

 Clicking [search employee account] of [visitor management] tab among menus on the left of the

main screen or 'Search' [ ] button of the toolbar on the top of the [employee account
management] displays a screen as follows.

+ Step 1) Input the company name. (Optional)

+ Step 2) Input employee number. (Optional)

+ Step 3) Input employee name using employee search button. (Optional (Optional)

+ Step 4) If you have input any of those, search results that match the condition appear.

+ If you have not input any of those and click [Search] button, all employees appear. On
search result, you can see the employee's basic information.

+ Step 6) You can select employees using check box on the selection row of search screen.

+ Step 7) After selecting check box, click modify [ ] button, then the selected employee
information is displayed on the employee web account management. Employee information
of employee on employee web account management screen is modifiable on employee web
account management screen. Double click an employee, and employee web account
management screen appears.

 Modify employee information

 Step 1) Search saved employee.

 Step 2) Input each item of an employee to modify and click save ( ) button on the toolbar.You
can see the modified information on the employee management, and to find the employee, you
need to search using the modified information.

370
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

14.3 Poor visitor management

14.3.1 Card inconsistency management

 Screen description

Card inconsistency management

 In the case that visit card is not process normal such as a card is not issued to a visitor and the validity
is expired, and the card is returned but check out is not processed, this menu shows visit information
which is not processed normally, and you can modify status of the card to use the card normally later
on.On the first screen, without regarding to search conditions, the program get all the registered data
which is inconsistent.

 How to use screen

 Step 1) Input the company name to visit. (Optional)

 Step 2) Input visitor name. (Optional)

 Step 3) Input a card number. (Optional)

 Step 4) Input the start date of the visit. (Optional)

 Step 5) Input the end date for a visit. (Optional)

 Modify inconsistent card information

+ Step 1) Search using search conditions.

+ Step 2) Tick check box of selection row

371
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

+ Step 3) Input reason and click save ( ) button of toolbar. Status to change is check out
and it is saved as check out.

 Card inconsistency condition

+ Case 1) In the case that after registering visit information, a card (of which validity is
expired) was given to a visitor without check in (tranfer), the status of card is displayed as
not issued. (It needs to be checked out.)

+ Case 2) The case that validity of checked in card is expired but the present status is check in.
(It needs to be checked out.)

372
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

14.3.2 Poor visitors registration

 Screen description

Poor visitor registration

 If a visitor cause a problem, register the visitor as poor visitor and prevent the visitor from requesting
visits. Poor visitor can request a visit after being cleared or removed from poor visitor.

 How to use screen

 Step 1) Click search [ ] button, and list of all the visitors appears as a pop up window. Input

visitor name and click search [ ] button. Double click a visitor to register as a poor visitor.

 Step 2) Poor visitor registration reason. : Input reason for the registration.

 Step 3) Whether cleared or not : Tick when the poor visitor is cleared. (Whether cleared or not is
possible after being registered as poor visitor.)

 Step 4) Poor visitor clear reason : Input reason for the clearance. (You can input this when whether
cleared or not is checked.)

373
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

Poor visitor registration - toolbar feature description

 Poor Visitor Search

 Method 1) Select from the combo box beside the quick find directly.

 Method 2) Click previous [ ] or next [ ] buttons and find a poor visitor you want.

 Method 3) Click Search [ ] button, and move to [poor visitor search] screen to find a poor visitor
you want.

 How to use [Poor Visitor Search] screen

 Clicking [search poor visitor] of [visitor management] tab among menus on the left of the main

screen or 'Search' [ ] button of the toolbar on the top of the [poor visitor registration] displays a
screen as follows.

+ Step 1) Input visitor name. (Optional)

+ Step 2) Input mobile phone number. (Optional)

+ Step 3) Input mobile phone number. (Optional)

+ Step 4) Input the company name. (Optional)

+ Step 5) Select visitor classification.(Optional)

+ Step 5) If you have input any of those, search results that match the condition appear. If
you have not input any of those and click [Search] button, all the poor visitors appear.

+ Step 6) You can select poor visitors using check box on the selection row of search screen.

+ Step 7) After selecting check box, click modify [ ] button, then the selected visitor
information is displayed on the poor visitor registration. Information of visitors on the poor
visitor registration screen is modifiable. Double click a visitor and it appears on the poor
visitor registration screen.

 Register poor visitor

+ Step 1) Click search ( ) button, and visitor list pops up.

+ Step 2) Double click a visitor to register as a poor visitor.

+ Step 3) Input reason for the registration. (Essential)

+ Step 4) Click save ( ) button on the toolbar.

 Clear poor visitor

374
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

+ Step 1) You can select a poor visitor directly from the combo box or use 'Previous' ( ) or

'Next' ( ) button.

+ Step 2) Check whether cleared or not.

+ Step 3) Input reason for the clearance. (Essential)

+ Step 4) Click save ( ) button on the toolbar.

 Delete poor visitor

+ Step 1) Select a poor visitor to delete among registered poor visitors from the combo box
at the left top.

+ Step 2) You can select a poor visitor directly from the combo box or use 'Previous' ( ) or

'Next' ( ) button.

+ Step 3) Click 'Delete' ( ) button of at the top toolbar.

 Delete cleared visitor

+ Step 1) Click search [ ] button, and list of all the visitors appears as a pop up window.

Input a cleared visitor name and click search [ ] button.

+ Step 2) Double click a cleared poor visitor.

+ Step 3) Click 'Delete' ( ) button of at the top toolbar. Because deleting it also deletes DB
information of the poor visitor, be cautious.

375
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

14.4 Visitor types and special notice

14.4.1 Visitor types registration

 Screen description

Visitor types registration

 Visitor type allows you to register visitors by type. It is an essential item for visitor information
management, and also used for search or report. To register visitor on visitor information management,
visitor type should be saved.

 How to use screen

 Step 1) Select a company. (Essential)

 Step 2) Input a visitor type name. (Essential)

 Step 3) Input visitor type description.

Visitor type registration - toolbar feature description

 Search visitor type

 Method 1) Select from the combo box beside the quick find directly.

 Method 2) Click previous [ ] or next [ ] buttons and find a visitor type you want.

 Method 3) Click Search [ ] button, and move to [visitor type search] screen to find a visitor type
you want.

 How to use [Visitor Type Search] screen

 Clicking [search visitor type] of [visitor management] tab among menus on the left of the main

screen or 'Search' [ ] button of the toolbar on the top of the [visitor type registration] displays a
screen as follows.

376
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

+ Step 1) Select a company. (Optional)

+ Step 2) Input a visitor type name. (Optional)

+ Step 3) If you have input any of those, search results that match the condition appear.

+ If you have not input any of those and click [Search] button, all the visitor types appear. On
search result, you can see basic information of the visitor type.

+ Step 4) You can select visitor type using check box on the selection row of search screen.

+ Step 5-1) After selecting check box, click modify [] button, then the selected visitor type

information is displayed on the visitor type screen. You can modify or delete the visitor
type that is displayed on the visitor type registration screen on the visitor type registration
screen.

+ Step 5-2) After selecting check box, click delete [ ], then the selected visitor type is
deleted.

 Create new visitor type

+ Step 1) Click new [ ] button and the message box appears as follows.

+ Step 2) Click [yes] and [visitor type registration] screen is reset.

 Save visitor type

+ Step 1) Input all the essential input items into the visitor type registration.

+ Step 2) On the toolbar, click the save [ ] button. (Visitor type is saved basically after
inputting essential input items.)

 Modify visitor type

+ Step 1) Click search button and double click a visitor type to modify.

+ Step 2) Change each item and click 'Save' ( ) button.

 Delete visitor type

+ Step 1) Search saved visitor type.

+ Step 2) Load the found visitor types into [visitor type registration] screen.

+ Step 3) Click delete [ ] button and the message box appears as follows.

377
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Step 4) Click [yes] button and the registered visitor type is deleted.

378
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

14.4.2 Special notice registration

 Screen description

Special notice registration

 You can register, delete, and search notice, and register special notice and show the special notice
during the notice period based on the notice classification.From start date of notice to end date of
notice, in the case of selecting yes as whether to notice or notand application program as notice
classification, notice appears when clicking visitor management menu after launching Enterprise and in
the case of selecting web site as notice classification, the notice appears as a first page when a visitor or
an employee accesses a web site.

 How to use screen

 Step 1) Select a company. (Essential)

 Step 2) Input the title. (Essential)

 Step 3) Start the start date of notice. (Essential)

 Step 4) Input the end date of notice. (Essential)

 Step 5) For whether to notice or not, select 'Use' or 'Unused'. (Essential)

 Step 6) For notice classification, select application program or Website. (Essential) (Essential)

 Step 7) Input contents of notice.(Essential)

 (Note)

+ In the case of selecting application program as notice classification : Select use as whether
to notice or not, the date of notice should be between start and end date of notice, select

379
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

application program as notice classification, and save it. If you tick 'Do not open this page
for 1 day' at the bottom of special notice, the pop up window does not appears even if you
click visitor management menu. If you do not tick, it appears whenever you click visitor
management menu.

+ In the case of selecting web site as notice classification : Select use as whether to notice or
not, the date of notice should be between start and end date of notice, select web site as
notice classification, and save it. The special notice appears as a first page when a visitor or
an employee accesses the web site, and it does not appears after the end date of notice.

Special notice registration - toolbar feature description

 Search notice

 Method 1) Select from the combo box beside the quick find directly.

 Method 2) Click previous [ ] or next [ ] buttons and find a special notice you want.

 Method 3) Click Search [ ] button, and move to [special notice search] screen to find a poor visitor

380
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

you want.

 How to use [Search Special notice] screen

 Clicking [search special notice] of [visitor management] tab among menus on the left of the main

screen or 'Search' [ ] button of the toolbar on the top of the [special notice registration] displays a
screen as follows.

+ Step 1) Select a company. (Optional)

+ Step 2) Select whether notice or not (Optional)

+ Step 3) Select one among title, contents, and writer. (Optional)

+ Step 4) Input contents to search. (Optional)

+ Step 5) Select period of notice. (Optional)

+ Step 6) If you have input any of those, search results that match the condition appear.

+ If you have not input any of those and click [Search] button, all notices appear. On search
result, you can see the basic information of the each notice.

+ Step 7) You can select notice using check box on the selection row of search screen.

+ Step 8-1) After selecting check box, click modify [ ] button, then the selected special
notice information is displayed on the special notice registration screen. You can modify or
delete the special notice that is displayed on the special notice registration screen on the
special notice registration screen.

+ Step 8-2) After selecting check box, click delete [ ], then the selected special notice is
deleted.

 Create new special notice

+ Step 1) Click new [ ] button and the message box appears as follows.

+ Step 2) Click [yes] and [special notice registration] screen is reset.

 Save special notice

381
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

+ Step 1) Click search button and double click a special notice to modify.

+ Step 2) Change each item and click 'Save' ( ) button.

 Delete special notice

+ Step 1) Search saved special notice.

+ Step 2) Load the found special notices into [special notice registration] screen.

+ Step 3) Click delete [ ] button and the message box appears as follows.

+ Step 4) Click [yes] button and the registered special notice is deleted.

382
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

14.5 Database administration

14.5.1 Import visitor information

 Screen description

Import (Card holder information)

 You can get visitor information which is saved in a file of specific format and save the information into
database in a batch.

 How to use screen

 Step 1) Select a company name to visit. (Essential)

 Step 2) Select visitor classification. (Essential)

 Step 3)A file which is selected using [File open] button and in which visitor information is saved is
displayed.

 Step 4) Tick in the case that first row of the imported file is used as column title.

 Step 5) Select a type to distinguish data from date of imported file as delimiter type.

+ CSV Delimited : Select it when data is distinguished by comma(,).

+ Tab Delimited : Select it when data is distinguished by tab.

+ Custom Delimited : Select it when data is distinguished by one other that comma and tab.

 Step 6) User defined delimiter is activated only when [Custom delimiter] is selected as delimiter type
and input delimiter manually.

383
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Step 7) Excel sheet name is activated only when an imported file is an excel file. Input sheet in which
import data is saved.

 Step 8) Data mapping by column.

+ Data column (File) : Click [Connect], and header name of visitor information which is saved
in the imported file is displayed in the data column(file).

+ Data column (DB) : It is column name of database table to which visitor information is
inputted. You can select visitor name, personal ID, e-mail, cell phone number, department
number, position name, company name to visit, company phone number, fax number,
company homepage, address information, and plate number from the combo box. Data in
red is essential mapping column and you have to set it.

 Step 9) Data preview displays mapped information of database column and header which is selected
from the imported file. This data is date to import to card holder information table.

Export

 You can export visitor information in the database, and you can search visit history saved in database
based on 'export search condition' and export it into the specific file.

 How to use screen

 Step 1) Select and set export type.

 Step 2) Select excel or text as export type.

 Step 3) Select file : Input path of a file to export. If the file is already existing, the file is overwritten.
Be cautious.

 Step 4) Delimiter type : Select a type to distinguish data from date of exported file.

384
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

+ CSV Delimited : Select it when data is distinguished by comma(,).

+ Tab Delimited : Select it when data is distinguished by tab.

+ Custom Delimited : Select it when data is distinguished by one other that comma and tab.

 Step 5) User defined delimiter is activated only when [Custom delimiter] is selected as delimiter type
and input delimiter manually.

 Step 6) Select visitor information or visitor history as data type.

 Step 7) Export search condition is activated when data type is visitor history and the program get
visit list which is in the range of search condition.

 Step 8) Based on the condition, data preview displays data to export in advance.

 Import file connection

+ Step 1) Click open to select file to import.

+ Step 2) Open dialog which is provided windows system appears.

+ Step 3) Select text file, CSV file, or excel file as import file format and click a file you want.

+ Step 4) Check [Use first row as title of column] when data column title is saved in the first
row of the selected file.

+ Step 5) Select file data and delimiter.

+ Step 6) Click [connect] button and data is displayed from imported file based on delimiter
format.

 Data mapping

+ Step 1) Map column of database table to input card holder data and displayed data column
1 by 1.

+ Step 2) In the case that data column (DB) is set to blank, it is not mapped and it is excluded
from subject to be saved database when importing.

+ Step 3) Click [mapping], and data to save is displayed on the data preview grid.

385
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Data Save

+ Step 1) Data on the data preview grid is data to be saved as card holder information.

+ Step 2) Click [Data save] button, the displayed data is saved into the database.

 Example of how to import

 Method 1) In the case that It is text file and delimiter is ','.

 Caution : When creating import file, in the case that there are local languishes other then English,
you have to save it in unicode (UTF-8, UTF-16) format.

 (ex) Select encoding from notepad when saving.)

+ Step1) Input name to map on the top row. (Name, personal ID, e-mail, cell phone number,
company, department, position, and company to visit)

+ Step2) Input data by order from second row.

 Method 2) In the case that it is excel file

+ Step1) Input name to map on the top row. (Employee ID, name, company, and company to
visit)

+ Input data by order from second row.

 Select and set export type.

 Method 1) Export into excel file

+ Step1) Select excel as export type.

+ Step2) Select excel file to which export date.

+ Step3) Input sheet name.

+ Step4) Click connect.

+ Step5) Select visitor information or visitor history as data type.

+ Step6) Set period.

+ Step7) Click import data, and data to save is displayed.

+ Step8) Click export button.

 Method 2) Export into text file

+ Step1) Select excel as export type.

386
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

+ Step2) Select text file to which export date.

+ Step3) Select delimiter type (CVS, Tab, Custom).

+ Step4) In the case of selecting custom, input user defined delimiter.

+ Step5) Click [Ok].

+ Step6) Select data type.

+ Step7) In the case that data type is visit history, set period.

+ Step8) Click import data, and data to save is displayed.

+ Step9) Click export button.

387
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

14.6 Visitor information report

14.6.1 Visitor information report

 Screen description

Visitor information report

 Visitor information report is provided in a report form based on visitor information, and you can print or
export.

 How to use screen

 Step 1) Select visitor classification. (Optional)

 Step 2) Input the company name. (Optional)

 Step 3) Input visitor name. (Optional)

 Step 4) Input mobile phone number. (Optional)

 Step 5) Input e-mail. (Optional)

 Step 6) Select sort type. (Optional)

+ Sort type is order of data display when printing report.

+ There are visitor type, visitor name, and company name for sort type.

 Step 7) Select sort order. (Optional)

+ Sort order is to select whether the sort type is displayed in ascending order or descending

388
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

order.

 Step 8) After selecting search conditions and sort type/sort order from step 1 ~7, click [ ] button
on the toolbar. If you do not select search conditions and sort type/sort order from step 1 ~7,
report for all the visitors are displayed on the report preview.

 Step 9-1) To print report preview screen, click print button on the report preview toolbar.

 Step 9 -2) To export preview screen into a file of a form you want, click 'export' button of report
preview toolbar.Once export pop up window appears, select a file format you want click ok.

389
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

14.6.2 Reservation status report

 Screen description

Reservation status report

 Reservation status report is provided in a report form based onvisitor information, and you can print or
export.

 How to use screen

 Step 1) Select visitor classification.(Optional)

 Step 2) Input the company name. (Optional)

 Step 3) Input visitor name. (Optional)

 Step 4) Input mobile phone number. (Optional)

 Step 5) Input e-mail. (Optional)

 Step 6) Click [ ] button beside receptionist, select employees from [search employee] below, and
click [ok] button. (Optional)

 Step 7) Input date of visit reservation. (Optional)

 Step 8) Select sort type. (Optional)

+ Sort type is order of data display when printing report.

+ There are visitor classification and visitor name for sort type.

390
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Step 9) Select sort order. (Optional)

+ Sort order is to select whether the sort type is displayed in ascending order or descending
order.

 Step 10)After selecting search conditions and sort type/sort order from step 1 ~ 9, click view report

[ ] button on the toolbar. If you do not select search conditions and sort type/sort order from
step 1 ~ 8, report for all the reservations are displayed on the report preview.

 Step 10-1) To print report preview screen, click print button on the report preview toolbar.

 Step 11-2) To export preview screen into a file of a form you want, click 'export' button of report
preview toolbar.Once export pop up window appears, select a file format you want click ok.

391
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

392
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

14.6.2 Visit status report

 Screen description

Visit status report

 Visit status report is provided in a report form based on visit information, and you can print or export.

 How to use screen

 Step 1) Select report type. . (Optional)

+ Visit status report - shows visit status by visitor.

+ Visit status report (by period) - shows visit status by date.

 Step 2) Input period of visit. (Optional)

 Step 3) Select visitor classification.(Optional)

 Step 4) Input visitor name. (Optional)

 Step 5) Input mobile phone number. (Optional)

 Step 6) Input the company name. (Optional)

 Step 7) Click [ ] button beside receptionist, select employees from [search employee] below, and
click [ok] button. (Optional)

393
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Step 8) Select sort type. (Optional)

+ Sort type is order of data display when printing report.

+ There are visitor type, visitor name, and company name for sort type.

 Step 9) Select sort order. (Optional)

+ Sort order is to select whether the sort type is displayed in ascending order or descending
order.

 Step 10)After selecting search conditions and sort type/sort order from step 1 ~ 9, click view report

[ ] button on the toolbar. If you do not select search conditions and sort type/sort order from
step 1 ~ 9, report for all the visit status is displayed on the report preview.

 Step 11-1) To print report preview screen, click print button on the report preview toolbar.

 Step 11-2) To export preview screen into a file of a form you want, click 'export' button of report

394
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

preview toolbar.

395
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

14.6.4 Poor visitor status report

 Screen description

Poor visitor status report

 Poor visitor status report is provided in a report form based onpoor visitor, and you can print or export.

 How to use screen

 Step 1) Input the date of registering the poor visitor. (Optional (Optional)

 Step 2) Select visitor classification.(Optional)

 Step 3) Select sort type. (Optional)

+ Sort type is order of data display when printing report.

+ There are visitor name, and registered date for sort type.

 Step 4) Select sort order. (Optional)

+ Sort order is to select whether the sort type is displayed in ascending order or descending
order.

 Step 5) After selecting search conditions and sort type/sort order from step 1 ~ 4, click [ ] button
on the toolbar. If you do not select search conditions and sort type/sort order from step 1 ~ 4,
report for all the poor visitors are displayed on the report preview.

396
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Step 6-1) To print report preview screen, click print button on the report preview toolbar.

 Step 6-2) To export preview screen into a file of a form you want, click 'export' button of report
preview toolbar.Once export pop up window appears, select a file format you want click ok.

397
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

14.6.5 Statistics report

 Screen description

Statistics report

 Statistics status report is provided in a report form based on graph of visit information, and you can
print or export.

 How to use screen

 Step 1) Select chart type.(Optional)

 Step 2) Input visit period. (Optional)

+ In the case of selecting by time according to visit period, data is accumulated by each time
and displayed in the selected chart type.

+ In the case of selecting by date according to visit period, data is accumulated by each date
and displayed in the selected chart type.

+ In the case of selecting by day according to visit period, data is accumulated by each day
and displayed in the selected chart type.

+ In the case of selecting by month according to visit period, data is accumulated by each
month and displayed in the selected chart type.

+ In the case of selecting by quarter according to visit period, data is accumulated by each
quarter and displayed in the selected chart type.

+ In the case of selecting by year according to visit period, data is accumulated by each year

398
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

and displayed in the selected chart type.

 Step 3) After selecting search conditions from step 1 ~ 2, click [ ] button on the toolbar. Report
is displayed on the report preview screen.

399
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Step 4-1) To print report preview screen, click print button on the report preview toolbar.

 Step 4-2) To export preview screen into a file of a form you want, click 'export' button of report
preview toolbar.Once export pop up window appears, select a file format you want click ok.

400
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

14.7 Event status report

14.7.1 Visitor normal event report

 Screen description

Visitor normal event report

 Visitor normal event report is provided in a report form based on visitor information event, and you can
print or export.

 How to use screen

 Step 1) Select event time. (Optional (Optional)

 Step 2) Select event type.(Optional)

 Step 3) Input a card number. (Optional)

 Step 4) Input visitor name. (Optional)

 Step 5) Click [ ] button beside door, select doors from [door search] below, and click [ok] button.
(Optional)

401
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Step 6) Select sort type. (Optional)

+ Sort type is order of data display when printing report.

+ There are visitor name, and event time for sort type.

 Step 7) Select sort order. (Optional)

+ Sort order is to select whether the sort type is displayed in ascending order or descending
order.

 Step 8) After selecting search conditions and sort type/sort order from step 1 ~ 7, click [ ] button
on the toolbar. If you do not select search conditions and sort type/sort order from step 1 ~7,
report for all the doors are displayed on the report preview.

402
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Step 9-1) To print report preview screen, click print button on the report preview toolbar.

 Step 9-2) To export preview screen into a file of a form you want, click 'export' button of report
preview toolbar.Once export pop up window appears, select a file format you want click ok.

403
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

14.7.2 Visitor alarm event report

 Screen description

Visitor alarm event report

 Visitor alarm event report is provided in a report form based on visitor alarm information event, and
you can print or export.

 How to use screen

 Step 1) Select alarm period. (Optional)

 Step 2) Select alarm type. (Optional)

 Step 3) Input a card number. (Optional)

 Step 4) Input visitor name. (Optional)

 Step 5) Click [ ] button beside door, select doors from [door search] below, and click [ok] button.
(Optional)

404
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Step 6) Select sort type. (Optional)

+ Sort type is order of data display when printing report.

+ There are visitor name, and event time for sort type.

 Step 7) Select sort order. (Optional)

+ Sort order is to select whether the sort type is displayed in ascending order or descending
order.

 Step 8) After selecting search conditions and sort type/sort order from step 1 ~ 7, click [ ] button
on the toolbar. If you do not select search conditions and sort type/sort order from step 1 ~7,
report for all the visitor alarm events are displayed on the report preview.

 Step 9-1) To print report preview screen, click print button on the report preview toolbar.

 Step 9-2) To export preview screen into a file of a form you want, click 'export' button of report
preview toolbar.Once export pop up window appears, select a file format you want click ok.

405
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

406
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

407
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

15. MONITORING

15.1 Output Monitoring

15.1.1 Output Monitoring

Check status of the door and output point and control. It is only possible to check status of input point but does not
control.

 Screen Description

Door Tab

 List of Door

 Location: Location of the door.

 Door name: Name of the door.

 Status: Status of the door.

 컨텍스트 메뉴 : 출입문을 선택한 후 마우스 우클릭하면 표시됩니다. 선택한 컨텍스트 메뉴에 따라


출입문을 제어합니다.

 Icon display type

408
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 All

 By Building-Floor

+ Select the building.

+ Select the floor.

 Zone

+ Select the Zone.

 Output Group

+ Select the output group.

 Icon

 Display current status of the door.

 If status is unable to trace, icon is not displayed.

Output Tab

 List of output point

 Location: Location of the output point.

 Output name: Name of the output point.

 Status: Status of the output point.

 컨텍스트 메뉴 : 출력점점을 선택한 후 마우스 우클릭하면 표시됩니다. 선택한 컨텍스트 메뉴에


따라 출력접점을 제어합니다.

409
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Icon display type

 All

 By building-floor

+ Select the building.

+ Select the floor.

 Zone

+ Select the Zone.

 Output group

+ Select the output group.

 Icon

 Display current status of output point.

 If status is unable to trace, icon is not displayed.

Input Tab

 List of Input point

 Location: Location of the input point.

 Input name: Name of the input point.

 Status: Status of the input point.

 Icon Display type

410
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 All

 By building-floor

+ Select the building.

+ Select the floor.

 Zone

+ Select the Zone.

 Icon

 Display current status of the input point.

 If status is unable to trace, icon is not displayed.

 Function Description

 Door Control

 Select the door to be controlled.

 Click ‘Activate’ to activate or ‘Deactivate’ to deactivate.

+ User can select ‘Lock’ , ‘Unlock’ , ‘Unlock for 3 seconds’ , ‘Unlock for 5 seconds’ , ‘Unlock for
10 seconds’ by right click.

 Output Control

 Select the device to be controlled.

 Click ‘Activate’ to activate or ‘Deactivate’ to deactivate.

+ User can select ‘Inactive’, ‘Activate’, ‘Activate for 10 seconds’, ‘Activate for 30 seconds’,
‘Activate for 60 seconds’ by right click.

411
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

15.2 Intergrated Monitoring

15.2.1 Intergrated Monitoring

Check the status of the device and access.

 Screen Description

 Card Information: Display the user information if it is registered.

 Graphic Map: Display the graphic map when event occur. Or if graphic map exist for the corresponding
floor.

 If graphic map is displayed, event device will be emphasized for several seconds.

 If graphic map is not displayed, no changes occur.

 Display Event

 Normal Event: Event appears when status of device and access is normal.

 Alarm Event: Alarm event appears when status of device and access is abnormal.

 Auditing Log: Display the usage breakdown.

 Function Description

 Lock Graphic map

 When ‘Lock Graphic map’ button is selected, only the single graphic map is displayed.

 Previous map

412
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Move to previous map.

 Alarm Confirmation

 Confirm the selected Alarm event.

 Alarm Confirmation with description

 Confirm the selected Alarm event and record the contents.

 Alarm Confirmation for All Displayed Data

 Confirm all of Alarm events on screen.

 Alarm Confirmation for All Data

 Confirm all of Alarm events on screen and database.

 Modify Card information display

 Go to ‘Card information display’ and below image will appear when right clicked.

 Mark items, which will be displayed.

 Modify Audit Log item

 Go to ‘Item Name’ and below image will appear when right clicked.

 Mark items, which will be displayed.

 Modification completes, click any part of the screen except ‘menu’

 Output control

413
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Go to ‘Graphic map’ and place cursor on door or output device and below image will appear when
right clicked.

 Select desired control items.

414
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

16. TOOL

16.1 User Account Setting

16.1.1 User Account Registration

Register user who can log on to program.

 Screen Description

User Registration

 User ID: Insert User ID.(Required field)

 Password: Insert the password.(Required field)

 Password confirm: Insert same password.(Required field)

 Register fingerprint: Verify fingerprint by Hamster.

 Company: Select the company, where the user belongs to.

 Description: Insert description of the user.

 Function Description

 Register User

 Click ‘New’ then window changes into insert mode.

 Insert User name.(Required field)

 Insert each field and click ‘Save’( ).

415
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Modify User

 Select the User to modify from User list.

 Select directly from combo-box or user can select by clicking ‘Previous’( ) or ‘Next’( ).

 Modify each field and click ‘Save’( ).

 Delete User

 Select the User to delete from User list.

 Select directly from combo-box or user can select by clicking ‘Previous’( ) or ‘Next’( ).

 Click ‘Delete’( ).(‘Admin’account is not able to deleted)

 Search User

 Go to Main screen and Operation management Tab and click ‘Search’. Or go to registration screen

and click ‘Search’( ), then screen below will appear.

 Set User name as search condition.

 ‘Select’columnenables to select the User. Select desired User to delete and click ‘Delete’( ), then

selected users will be deleted. Also click ‘Modify’( ) then, User information displays on screen and
now able to modify.

416
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

16.1.2 Accounts Group Setting

Register groups, those users will be a member of.

 Screen Description

Accounts Group Registration

 Accounts group Name: Insert user group.

 Description: Insert description of the user group.

 Member: Select user ID, those who will be member of the group. (Able to select more than one.)

 Function Description.

Accounts Group Registration

 Register Accounts Group

 Click ‘New’ then window changes into insert mode.

 Insert Accounts Group name.(Required field)

 Insert description.

 Select members to include in the group from the list.

 Select whether it is Administrator or not.

 Insert each field and click ‘Save’( ).

 Modify Accounts Group

 Select the Accounts Group to modify from User Group list.

 Select directly from combo-box or Accounts Group can select by clicking ‘Previous’( ) or

417
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

‘Next’( ).

 Modify each field and click ‘Save’( ).

 Delete Accounts Group

 Select the Accounts Group to delete from Accounts Group list.

 Select directly from combo-box or Accounts Group can select by clicking ‘Previous’( ) or

‘Next’( ).

 Click ‘Delete’( ).(‘Admin’group must not be deleted)

 Search Accounts Group

 To display the screen as below, click the overtime work search on left main menu or click the ( )
button on top toolbar.

 Search user account group name from search condition.

 On search screen, you can select overtime work on the checkbox. If you click the delete ( ) button
after selected overtime work, the selected overtime work is deleted. You can change the registered

overtime work in the window by clicking the change ( ) button on top toolbar

To display the screen as below, click the overtime work search on left main menu or click the ( )
button on top toolbar.

418
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

16.1.3 Accounts Group Role Setting

Configure what type of authority will be granted to groups.

 Screen Description

User Accounts Group Role Setting

 User Accounts Group Name: List of Groups appears.

 전체선택 : 체크박스를 모두 선택합니다.

 전체해제 : 체크박스를 모두 선택 해제합니다.

 Function Description

User Accounts Role Setting

 User Accounts RoleRegistration

 Select groups to grant authority.

 Mark the tick boxes, authority will be granted according to the marks.

 Fields with black background are inactivated. Unable to select.

 When setting complete, click ‘Save’( ).

419
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

Field Description

Menu Name Tree-menu name.

Display Menu Display Menu or not.

New Display ‘New’ on toolbar or not.

Save Display ‘Save’ on toolbar or not.

Delete Display ‘Delete’ on toolbar or not.

Clear Display ‘Clear’ on toolbar or not.

Search Display ‘Search Window’ on toolbar or not.

Synchronization Display ‘Synchronization’ on synchronization menu or not.

Report Preview Display ‘Report Preview’ on toolbar or not.

Send Display ‘Send’ on toolbar or not.

Receive Display ‘Reception’ on toolbar or not.

BatchTransmit Display ‘BatchSend’ on toolbar or not.

Batch Receive Display ‘Batch Reception’ on toolbar or not.

420
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

16.2 Multi-language Setting

16.2.1 Language Convertor

 Screen Description

Common code language Setting

Configure commonly used fields within registered language.

Form language Setting

Configuretexts including; labels and buttons, corresponding to registered language.

Menu language Setting

Configure menu language to multi-luggage setting.

421
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

Message language Setting

Configure several error message or alert messages to multi-language setting.

Tool tip language Setting

Configure tool tip texts to multi-language setting.

422
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

Option language Setting

Configure option texts to multi-language setting.

Protocol language Setting

Configure protocol language to multi-language setting.

 Function Description

 Save

 Insert/Modify each field with Korean, English or other languages according to its Code.

 When modification complete, click ‘Save’.

423
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

16.2.2 Language Setting

Change language.

 Screen Description

Multi-language change

 Select Language: Select language which will be used.

 Change Language name: In case any language added, insert name of the language.

 Function Description

Multi-language change

 Save

 Select desired language for ‘Language’ and ‘Font’.

 When process complete, click ‘Save’( ).

424
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

16.3 Notification setting

16.3.1 E-mail/SMS Server setting

Configures e-mail/SMS notifying function to supervisor upon event occurrence of event.

 Screen description

E-mail Server setting

Configureinformation for notifying event occurrencethrough e-mail.

 Use e-mail Notice: whether or not to use e-mail notification at event occurrence.

 SMTP host (Port): the address and port number of the e-mail server.

 E-mail: the e-mail address of the notification sender.

 Password: the password for the e-mail account of the sender.

SMS service Server setting

Configureinformation for notifying event occurrencethrough SMS.

 Use SMS Notice: whether or not to use SMS notification at event occurrence.

 Location: configure the region whether in or out of Korea.

425
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 SMS service Server: the address and port number of SMS server.

 Log on ID: the ID of the SMS server user.

 Password: the password of the SMS server user.

 Mobile Phone number: the Mobile Phone number of the sender.

 Notice items: select the items to send through SMS.

 SMS are limited to 80 characters, thus item selection is required.

 The only selected item among enterer who triggered the event, the time and the location will be
included in the notification.

 Subscription to the SMS service provider and ID/Password generation is required prior to using SMS
notification function. This service will be charged afterword.

 In Korea, subscription could be made at http://www.koreasmsair.com/ .

 Out of Korea, subscription could be made at http://www.ipipi.com/.

 Function description

 E-mail Server setting

 Select “use e-mail notice” function.

 Enter the server address and port number. E-mail servers usually use port 25.

 Enter the e-mail address of the sender.

 Enter the password of the sender’s e-mail account.

 Click Save( ) button.

 SMS Service Server setting

 Select “use SMS notice” function.

 Select the region according to user’s location.

 Enter the SMS host address and port number.

 Enter the user ID and password.

 Enter the mobile phone number of the sender.

 Select the items to send. If none is selected only event occurrence fact will be notified.

 Select Save( ) button.

426
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

16.3.2 Recipient setting

Configure the information for receiving the occurrence of event.

 Screen description

Receiver Information

 Name: the name of the receiver.

 E-mail: the e-mail address of the receiver.

 Mobile phone number: the mobile phone number to receive notification.

 Receiving Event: the events to receive and form of reception.

 Function description

 Registration

 Select the name of the person to receive.

 Enter the e-mail address or mobile phone number of the receiver.

 Enter the e-mail address and the mobile phone number.

+ At least one must be entered.

+ Note that notificationcannot be mode if the entered information is incorrect.

 Enter the format of the event to receive.

 Click Save( ) button.

 Changing

427
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Select the items to change from the list.

 Click the Change( ) button.

 Deleting

 Select the items to delete.

 Click delete( ) button.

428
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

16.4 Database Management

16.4.1 Database Backup and Restore

Access Control system data is stored in SQL Server 2005 database.To prevent data loss, you need tool offered with
SQL Server 2005 or have to make database backup by this manual. Database backup includes all existed data in the
database until completed backup.You can backup data or restore and available to set auto backup schedule. Also it
offers deletion function for unnecessary event information in database.

When you perform auto backup, SQL Server agent service has to in operation, because auto backup schedule is
controlled by SQL server agent.

If you want to restore database backup file, hard disk needs enough capacity. Also more than half of database drive
capacity must be available to use.

 Screen Description

Backup/Restore

 Current connected database information

 Database: Connected database is displayed.

 Server : Connected server instance is displayed.

 Login ID : The login ID used in connection with database is displayed.

 Database manual backup

 Backup file route: Not local PC, but route of the server database has installed is displayed.

 Backup file name : By browser the selected file name to backup is displayed and available to change
personally.

429
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Database auto backup

 Backup Period: You can create schedule to active backup by daily, weekly and monthly in appointed
time.You can set by backup period and available to create maximum of 3 schedules in same time.

 Schedule Operating Time : Respectively, you are able to set a backup time different at period by.

 Database restore

 Backup File Selection: As processing backup, backup file and file name display in not local PC but
the server database has installed.

Auto Management for Event Data

 Select Event Data

 Normal Event: It’s checking whether to delete event when the event generated in normal status of
device.

 Alarm Event : it checks whether to delete generated event when device’s status or access is not
working properly.

 In/Output Event : It checks whether to delete the event about in/output of device.

 Program Event : It checks used history and whether to delete event.

 Delete Condition

 Select period (one month to Sixty months) to delete event data from the basis on today.

 Auto Management Schedule

 Delete Period: Event is automatically selected in appointed time by daily, weekly and monthly. You
can create schedule to delete the event.It’s able to set by delete period and maximum of 3
schedules can be created.

 Schedule Operating Time : Respectively, you are able to set delete time different at period by

430
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Function Description

Backup/Restore

When database backup or restoring, SQL Server can be slower, so working in timezone where little events
exist is recommended.

 Manual Backup

 To appoint backup file route, click the ( ) file Brower button.

 PC directory structures where the SQL Server is installed are displayed.

 Select the file route to backup then click the ‘OK’ button.

 Input backup file name then the ‘Backup’ file is activated.

 Click the ‘Backup’ button then database backup is started by appointed file name.

 Auto Backup

 EveryDay Auto Backup

+ Everyday, if you want automatic database backup in appointed time, Select radio button of
‘Everyday’ and repetition date (1 – 31) then input schedule operating time, click the ‘Create’
button.

+ Auto backup file name is stored as ‘Access_Daily_Full_yyyymmdd.bak’ in backup directory


where SQL Server is installed.

Additional Information

Backup file of 'SQL Server 2005’ is stored in the folder ’systemdrive:\ Program
Files\Microsoft SQL Server\MSSQL.1\MSSQL\Backup’.
Systemdrive is drive letter where SQL Server 2005 is installed. Generally it’s ‘C’ drive.

431
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

+ If you select repetition date for ‘1’, backup performs everyday, but ‘2’ and over, backup is
performs in the selected date.

+ If you want to cancel the set schedule, click the ‘Delete’ button.

 Every Week Auto Backup

+ If you want to database backup automatically in the appointed day of every week, select
radio button of ‘Every week’ and repetition day(Sunday to Monday) then input schedule
operating time, click the ‘Create’ button.

+ Auto backup file is saved as the file name ‘Access_Month_Full_yyyymmdd.bak’ in backup


directory of the folder where SQL server is installed.

+ If you want to cancel the set schedule, click the ‘Delete’ button.

 Every Monthly Auto Backup

+ If you want to database backup automatically in the appointed date of every monthly, select
radio button of ‘Every monthly’ and repetition date(1 to 31) then input schedule operating
time, click the ‘Create’ button.

+ Auto backup file is saved as the file name ‘Access_Month_Full_yyyymmdd.bak’ in backup


directory of the folder where SQL server is installed.

+ If you want to cancel the set schedule, click the ‘Delete’ button.

 Restore

 If backup file is not appointed to use for restoring, the ‘Restore’ button cannot be clicked.

 To appoint backup file route, click the ‘File browser ( ) button.

 The PC’ composition of directory where SQL Server is installed is displayed.

 Select backup file route then click the ‘Confirm’button, so ‘Restore’ button can be activated.

 If you click the ‘Restore’ button, database restore is performed by appointed backup file name.

Event Data Auto Management

Data size of Normal status, Alarm, In/output and Program event increase everyday, then the increased data
may affect to performance of database. So, manager needs to delete event data periodically then database
can be operated in optimal status.

If you delete event data, the data is entirely deleted in database, so you need backup data periodically.

 Date Auto Delete

 Everyday Auto Event Delete

+ Check all type of event data from Normal status, Alarm, In/Output, Program event.

+ Select period to delete data from today to before months.

432
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

+ Select radio button of ‘Everyday’ and repetition date(1 – 31) then input schedule operating
time, click the ‘Create’ button.

+ If ‘1’ is selected for repetition date, the appointed event is deleted by setting condition
everyday, but ‘2’ is selected, it performs in sleeted date.

+ If you want to cancel the set schedule, click the ‘Delete’ button.

 Every Week Auto Event Delete

+ Check all type of event data to delete.

+ Select the period to delete data from today to before months.

+ Select radio button of ‘Every week’ and repetition day (Sunday to Monday), input schedule
operating time then click the ‘Create’ button.

+ If you want to cancel the set schedule, click the ‘Delete’ button.

 Every Monthly Auto Backup

+ Check all type of event data to delete.

+ Select radio button of ‘Everyday’ and repetition date (1 – 31) then input schedule operating
time, click the ‘Create’ button.

+ If you want to cancel the set schedule, click the ‘Delete’ button.

433
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

16.4.2 Data Import/Export

By data import function,you can store batch cardholder’s information to database.Export function let save information
for cardholder, event and time/attendance closing with various type of format.

 Screen Description

Import(Cardholder Information)

 Select file to import and setting

 Select file: Bythe ‘Open file’ button, the file selected cardholder’s information is stored is displayed.

 Delimiter Type : Select delimiter type between import data.

+ CSV Delimited : Select it, if between data are separated by (,).

+ Tab Delimited : Select it, if between data are separated by (Tab).

+ Custom Delimited : Select it, in another case except (,) and (Tab).

 User Defined Delimiter : If you select delimiter type for ’Custom Delimited’ then it is activated then
you can input delimiter manually.

 ExcelSheetName : It’s only activated when import file is excel format and input the sheet which
includes import data.

 Data Mapping by Column and Preview

434
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Data Mapping by Column

+ Data Column(File) : Click the ‘Connection’ button then header name of cardholder’s
information is displayed.

+ Data Column(DB) : It’s column name of database table to input cardholder’s


information.From combo box, you can select company name, employee number, employee
name, card number, department name, position name, title name, gender, email, phone
number, office number and mobile number. The data displayed with red color is compulsory
mapping column, so you have to set it.

 Data Preview : it displays selected header, database column and mapping information in import
file.The data is performing import to cardholder information table.

Select Export Type and Definition

 Table Setting

 Type:Select export type from database, excel and text.

 DSN : Select it from the applicable database has installed in DSN list.

 ID : The field for inputting ID to connect to database.

 Password : The field for inputting password to connect to database.

 Destination Setting

 It displays source database and target database.

 SourceDatabase

435
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

+ Server:It displays the server instance which is now in use.

+ Database Name : It displays the database name which is now in use.

+ Table : Select a table from available to export cardholder, event and time/attendance closing
table.

+ Period : In the selected table data, set the export target period.

 Target Database

+ Server:It displays the server instance to perform export.

+ Database Name : It displays the database name which is performing export.

+ Table : Select the table to perform export from selected database.

 Data Setting : It maps data.

 Screen Description

Import(Cardholder Information)

 Import File Connection

 To select import file, click the file open button.

 Open dialog is displayed which window system offered.

 For import file type, select text, CSV and excel file you wish to use.

 If data column name is saved in first line of selected file, check the ’use as name of column for first
line’.

 Select file data and data delimiter.

 Click the ‘Connection’ button then the fixed data with delimiter type is displayed.

 Data Mapping

 On displayed data column, map the database table to input cardholder’s information by one to one.

 If data column has set as blank, when performing import, it is accepted about database save target.

436
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 If you click the ‘Mapping’ button then the save target data is displayed on data preview greed.

 Data Save

 The data displayed on preview greed is saved as cardholder’s information.

 If you click the ‘Data Save’ button then the displayed data is saved in database.

 Example, to make import file

 If it’s text file and delimiter is ’/’

 Import Fail

 If import has failed, the error appears as below, and it is recorded in log, so change the import file
then tries it again.

 Log file is created as file name ’LogImport.txt’ in Log directory.

Export type Selection and Setting

 Export

 Export to Database

+ Select export target type for database.

+ Select ‘DSN’ then input ID and password, click the connection button.

+ Select table you wish to use in source database.

+ Set period.

+ Click the ‘Data Import’ button.

+ In mapping data, map‘Source Column’ and‘Destination Column’ then click the ‘Mapping’
button.

+ The data mapping to save is displayed.

+ Click the export.

 Export as Excel

+ Select the ‘Excel’ for export target type.

437
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

+ Select excel file to export data.

+ Input sheet name.

+ Set period.

+ If you click the ‘data import’ button , data’s information to save is displayed.

+ Click the ‘Export’ button.

 Export as Text

+ Select the ‘Text’ for export target type.

+ Select the ‘Text’ file.

+ Select the ‘Delimiter’ or input manually.

+ Set period.

+ If you click the ‘data import’ button , data’s information to save is displayed.

+ Click the ‘Export’ button.

438
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

16.5 Options

16.5.1 Options

This screen is to configure items to be monitored, font or color of text, alarm Sound or icons.

 Screen Description

Monitoring – Whether to monitor by events or not

This screen is to configure whether to monitor by events or not. Those events selected on this stage can only
be monitored.

 List on left: Select type of option.

 List on right: Select detail.

 Reload: Search again.

 Select All: Select all.

 Remove All: Cancel all.

Monitoring – Font Color by Events

 This screen is to configure font type and color of text by events.

439
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 List on left: Select type of option.

 List on right: Configure detail.(Text color by events)

 Reloads: Search again the details.

Monitoring – Graphic Map Priority

 Configure the priority of graphic maps.

Monitoring – Select the door monitoring

This screen is to configure whether to monitor by door. Those doors selected on this stange can only be
monitored

440
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Set wherther use or not to monitor doors in monitoring : Select whether to use door setting function
for the door te be monitored. (If it is not in use, events of every door will be shown on integrated
monitoring)

 Wherher to use : If checked, it is activatedd to display event of selected doors on integrated monitoring.

 Reload : Search again.

 Select All : Select all.

 Remove All : Cancel all.

Alert – Alarm Sound

 Configure the alarm sound when event occur while monitoring.

 Alarm SoundWhether Use or Not: Select whether to use alarm Sound or not.

 Event: Display list of events.

 File: Display alarmSound files.

Display - Font

441
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Configure desired font for screen and report separately.

Display – Tooltip delay time

 Set time limit for tooltip to be displayed on screen.

Display – Display Biometric Data

 Configure whether to display biological information or not.

442
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

Display – Quick view mode setting

 Configure whether to display quick view mode setting or not.

Device – Registration Reader

 Set default value of registration reader.

System – Lock mode setting

443
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Set lock/unlock mode.

User Defined field – Customer property field Setting

 Configure customer property fields.

Video – Live indication by event type

 Set live indication by event type.

Video - Sets PC time by Recorder time

444
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Set PC time using Recorder time.

Visitor option - User defined Field

 Set user defined field of visitor.

Auto print mustering report – Whether to auto print mustering report

 Set up whether to auto print mustering report in the event of fire.

Retire – Retirement reservation or ID Auto Deletion setting

445
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD


 Retirement reservation setting – whether to use : Check whether to use the retirement reservation.

 Retirement reservation setting – reservation time : Set retirement reservation time.

 ID Auto deletion(device) setting – whether to use : Check whether to sue the ID Auto deletion(device).

 ID Auto deletion(device) setting – process time : .Set ID Auto deletion(device) time.

License – License Initialize Setting


 Folder Path : Path of database file.

 BackUp File Name : Name of database file needed for initializeing license

 License Initialize : Initialize license and database. All information set previously will be removed since
database is initialized.

Expire CardId – Expire CardId Auto deletion setting

446
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Whether to use : Expire cardid used to check whether the automatic deletion settings.

 Process time : Set the time to automatically delete expire cardid.

 Function Description

Apply Monitoring or not

 Select desired items, and click ‘Apply’.

 Configured details are only applied to current PC.(Saved on Client.xml)

 Hence, if same user log on to program from different PC, saved data will not be applied.

Apply change text color

 Select details of color and click ‘Apply’

 Configured details only applied to current PC.(Saved on Client.xml)

 Hence, if same user log on to program from different PC, saved data will not be applied.

Graphic map priority

 Go to ‘Priority column’ and select combo then set priority for graphic maps.

 Priority is classified from ‘Highest’ to ‘Lowest’

Set up door to be moniotred

 Select the gate to display on integrated monitoring and click apply button.

Alarm Sound

 Select desired event and set as ‘Use Alarm Sound’.

 Select the Sound file.(Support only the Wave type.)

447
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

Font

 Select desired font type and click ‘Apply’.

Tooltip delay time

 Select time of display of tool tip on screen.

Biometric data display

 If ‘biological information display’ is marked, then the information is accessible on mastercard and user
management stage.

Quick view mode setting display

 If ‘Quick setting display’ is marked, then the quick setting is accessible on main screen.

Registration Reader

 Communication Port: Select Communication Port.

 Speed: Select desired speed.

 Parity: Select parity.

 Data bit: Select data bit

 Stop bit: Select stop bit.

Lock mode

 If ‘Lock mode’ is marked and set time, then Lock mode is compatible.

User Defined field

 Whether Use or Not: Select whether to use customer configured fields or not.

 If marked, customer property creates fields on user management.

 Field type: Select desired type of field; text domain, text box, check box or date.

 Label name: Insert desired name of label.

Live indication setting by event type

 Set whether to use live indication by event type on items by ticking check-box.

Set PC time by Recorder time

 Set PC time using Recorder time automatically or manually.

User-defined field (visitors)

 Whether Use or Not: Select whether to use the user-defined fields.

448
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Check, and a field is generated in user defined of visitor management.

 Field types : Select type you want among text area, a text box, check box, and date.

 Label Name : Input the label you want.

Whether to auto print mustering report

 Set up whether to auto print mustering report in the event of fire.

Retire

 Set up whether to use retirement reservation and to delete ID device . And set time.

License Initialize Setting

 Check whether there is databas file needed for license initializing and clcik license initialize button.

Expire CardId Auto deletion setting

 Set up whether to use Expire CardId Auto deletion setting. And set process time.

449
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

16.6 Icon

16.6.1 Icon Setting

This screen is to configure icon types.

 Screen Description

 Type: Select icon type.

 Icon group name: Insert name of icon group.

 Icon setting: Insert appropriate image.

 Description: Insert brief description of the icon group.

 Icon list: Display configured icons.

 New: Register new icons by type.

 Save: Save the selected icon type.

 Delete: Delete registered specific type.

Create Icon group

 Click ‘New’.

 Select ‘Type’.

 Insert name of the icon group.

 Select number of images according to the number of icons.

 Click ‘Save’.

Delete Icon group

450
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Select registered icon group.

 Click ‘Delete’.

Notice

Default icon types are incapable to delete.

Only added icon types are eligible to delete.

451
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

16.7 Delete Expired Card Id

16.7.1 Delete Expired Card Id

Querry a list of expired employee and deleting an access card expired from the device.

 Screen Description

 Expire card ID list: shows the list of expired ID.

 Search : Search for the expired employee list

 Select All : Select a list of all the devices of expired employee.

 Remove All :Uncheck the all the devices in the expired employee list .

 Delete : Delete the employee expires on the selected device.

 Close : Close the screen.

 Function Description

 Search expired card ID

 Clicking search button on right-top side of screen displays expired card ID

 Delete expired card ID

452
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Select the device that you want deleted from the expired access card list. It is selected by default.

 Click the delete button at the bottom right.

 Delete status : Shows the success or failure of the delete expired card. The initial value is only
waiting for deletion is successful on all devices is displayed as a success.

 State : Shows the success or failure of the delete on a device.

 Reason :If you failied to remove on a device to display the reason for the failure.

453
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

16.8 Delete Retiree Card Id

16.8.1 Delete Retiree Card Id

Retire retiree whose retirement process hasn’t been normally processed from database or device. ID registerd as
master card shouldn’t get an access, being used as other devices . In this case, if this card number goes through
retirement process, failure on retirement process will pop up because of the device registered with master card.

 Screen Description

  Retirement process : Retire retirees isted on the screen.

  Searching : Search list of ID that hasn’t gone through retirement process.

454
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

17. REPORT

17.1 System Setting Report

17.1.1 Device Setting Report

This screen is to select print condition of Device Setting Report.

 Screen Description

Search Condition

 Device Type: Select Controller and Biometric reader.

 ProductType

 Controller

+ Device type is activated and then selects one from controller, door, reader, input or output.

 Biometric reader

+ Device type is only activated for Controller. Hence, it is deactivated for biometric reader.

 Device List

 Controller

+ Select device type, and select one from controller, door, reader, input or output.

 Biometric reader

+ Registered biometric reader will be displayed.

Sort Type: User can print out in desired order.

 Criteria: Configure the order of data for print out.

 Controller -> Controller

+ Select within Controller name, Site name, Loop name and Whether Use or Not.

455
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Biometric reader

+ Select within Controller name, Site name, Loop name and Whether Use or Not.

 Controller ->Door

+ Select within Door name, Building, and Floor.

 Controller -> Reader

+ Select within Reader number, and Reader name.

 Controller ->Input

+ Select within Input number, Input name, Whether Use or Not, Input type, Building and Floor.

 Controller ->Output

+ Select withinOutput number, Output name, Whether Use or Not, Insert type, Building and
Floor.

 Sort Order

 Select whether to arrange in ascending/descending order.

 Function Description

Report Preview and Print-out.

 Select Device Type from Search condition box.

 Select Device type from Search condition box.

 Mark desired print-out device and biometric reader form Search condition box.

 Select criteria for Sort Type and Order.

 Select Sort Order for Sort Type and Order.

 Click ‘View’( ) on toolbar. Below is the image of searched result.

456
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 In order to print preview page, click ‘Print’ on toolbar. Then the report prints out.

 In order to Export preview page, click ‘Export’ on toolbar. Then the report is sent with desired file type.

457
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

17.1.2 Holiday Setting Report

This report illustrates registered Holiday status.

 Screen Description

Search condition

 Holiday management name: Search by Holiday management name.

 Holiday : Search by name of the Holiday.

 Date: Search by registered date of Holiday.

 Sort Type: Set order of data for printing the report.

 Select within Holiday management name, Holiday name, or date.

 Sort Order

 Select whether to arrange in ascending/descending order.

 Function Description

Report Preview and Print-out

 Insert Holidaymanagement as search condition.

 Insert Holiday name as search condition.

 Select date for search condition.

 Select criteria for Sort Type and Order.

 Select Sort Order for Sort Type and Order.

 Click ‘View’( ) on toolbar. Below is the image of searched result.

458
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 In order to print preview page, click ‘Print’ on toolbar. Then the report prints out.

 In order to export preview page, click ‘Export’ on toolbar. Then the report is sent with desired file type.

459
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

17.1.3 Timeschedule Report

This function is to print out the time schedule status report corresponding to the saved time schedule information.

 Screen Description

Search Condition

 Time schedule name: Search by time schedule name.

 Time zone name: Search by time zone name.

 Sort Type: Configure the order of data on report.

 Select between time schedule name and time zone name.

 Sort Order

 Select whether to arrange in ascending/descending order.

 Function Description

Report Preview and print out

 Insert time schedule name for search condition.

 Insert time zone name for search condition.

 Select criteria for Sort Type and Order.

 Select Sort Order for Sort Type and Order.

 Click ‘View’( ) on toolbar. Below is the image of searched result.

460
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 In order to print preview page, click ‘Print’ on toolbar. Then the report prints out.

 In order to export preview page, click ‘Export’ on toolbar. Then the report is sent with desired file type.

461
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

17.1.4 Access Group Setting Report

This screen is to select conditions to print out the access group status report.

 Screen Description

Search condition

 Company name: Select company name as search condition.

 Access group name: Select access group name as search condition.

 Sort Type: Configure the order of data on report.

 Select between company name and access group name.

 Sort Order

 Select whether to arrange in ascending/descending order.

 Function Description

Report Preview and print out

 Select company name as search condition for Report Preview and print out.

 Insert access group name for search condition.

 Select criteria for Sort Type and Order.

 Select Sort Order for Sort Type and Order.

 Click ‘View’( ) on toolbar. Below is the image of searched result.

462
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 In order to print preview page, click ‘Print’ on toolbar. Then the report prints out.

 In order to export preview page, click ‘Export’ on toolbar. Then the report is sent with desired file type.

463
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

17.2 User Information Report

17.2.1 Card Holder Report

This function is to print out the user list report corresponding to the saved user information.

 Screen Description

Search condition

 Report type

 Card Holder report – Type of the report which illustrates user information.

 Card Holder report(In detail) – Type of the report which illustrates more detailed user information.

 Employee ID: Insert employee ID.

 Card number: Insert card number.

 Name: Affective when search by employee name.

 In case of searching employee, click corresponding button and then employee list appears like the
image above and user can select employees from the employees list.

 Valid Date : Select valid date to be searched.

 Sort Type: Configure the order of data on report.

 Select among employee number, employee name, company and department.

 Sort Order

 Select whether to arrange in ascending/descending order.

 Function Description

Report Preview and print out

 Select user list report or user list report(In detail) for the report type.

 Insert employee number for search condition.

 Insert card number for search condition.

464
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Click ‘Search Employee’ and start search employee.

 Select criteria for Sort Type and Order.

 Select Sort Order for Sort Type and Order.

 Click ‘View’( ) on toolbar. Below is the image of searched result.

465
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 In order to print preview page, click ‘Print’ on toolbar. Then the report prints out.

 In order to export preview page, click ‘Export’ on toolbar. Then the report is sent with desired file type.

466
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

17.2.2 AllowedCardHolders by Door

This screen is to setting printing conditions for Accessible person list by door report.

 Screen Description

Search condition

 Door List: Used when user search by door.

 In case door information is used as search condition. Click the‘btnDoorSearch’ button then image
above appears. User can select doors from the door list.

 Sort Type: Configure the order of data on report.

 Select among door name, building or floor.

 Sort Order

 Select whether to arrange in ascending/descending order.

 Function Description

Report Preview and print out

 Select the door from door list for search condition.

 Click ‘View’( ) on toolbar. Below is the image of searched result.

467
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 In order to print preview page, click ‘Print’ on toolbar. Then the report prints out.

 In order to export preview page, click ‘Export’ on toolbar. Then the report is sent with desired file type.

468
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

17.2.3 Accessible Door Report by Person

This screen is to setting printing condition for accessible door report by person.

 Screen Description

Search condition

 Employee ID: Insert employee ID to be searched.

 Employee Name

 If you search employee’ name from search condition, click the passer search button to display the
passer’s list then you are able to select passer’s information which you wish to check.

 Card number: Insert the card number to be searched.

 Sort Type: Configure the order of data on report.

 Select among employee number, card number, company name and department name.

 Sort Order

 Select whether to arrange in ascending/descending order.

 Function Description

Report Preview and print out

 Insert employee number for search condition.

 Insert employee name for search condition

 Insert card number for search condition.

 Click ‘View’( ) on toolbar. Below is the image of searched result.

469
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 In order to print preview page, click ‘Print’ on toolbar. Then the report prints out.

 In order to export preview page, click ‘Export’ on toolbar. Then the report is sent with desired file type.

470
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

17.3 Event Report

17.3.1 Normal Event Report

This function is to print out the user access event report corresponding to the saved user event information.

 Screen Description

Search condition

 Event time: Select the range of time to be searched.

 Event type: Select the type of event to be searched.

 Card number: Insert the card number to be searched.

 User search

 In case employee information is used as search condition. Click the button then image above
appears. User can select the employee from the user list.

 Door search

 In case door information is used as search condition. Click the button then image above appears.
User can select doors from the door list.

 Employee Id : Insert the employee id to be searched

471
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

Sort Type and Order: User can print out in desired order.

 Sort Type: Configure the order of data on report.

 Select between user name and event time.

 Sort Order

 Select whether to arrange in ascending/descending order.

 Function Description

Report Preview and print out

 Select event time for search condition.

 Select event type for search condition.

 Insert card number for search condition.

 Insert employee name for search condition.

 Insert door name for search condition.

 Select criteria for Sort Type and Order.

 Select Sort Order for Sort Type and Order.

 Click ‘View’( ) on toolbar. Below is the image of searched result.

 In order to print preview page, click ‘Print’ on toolbar. Then the report prints out.

 In order to export preview page, click ‘Export’ on toolbar. Then the report is sent with desired file type.

472
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

473
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

17.3.2 Alarm Report

This function is to print out the alarm report corresponding to the saved user alarm information.

 Screen Description

Search condition


 Event time: Select the range of time to be searched.

 Event type: Select the type of event to be searched.

 Card number: Insert the card number to be searched.

 User search

 In case employee information is used as search condition. Click the button then image above
appears. User can select the employee from the user list.

 Door search

 In case door information is used as search condition. Click the button then image above appears.
User can select doors from the door list.

Sort Type and Order: User can print out in desired order.

 Sort Type: Configure the order of data on report.

 Select between user name and event time.

474
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Sort Order

 Select whether to arrange in ascending/descending order.

 Function Description

Report Preview and print out

 Select event time for search condition.

 Select event type for search condition.

 Insert card number for search condition.

 Insert employee name for search condition.

 Insert door name for search condition.

 Select criteria for Sort Type and Order.

 Select Sort Order for Sort Type and Order.

 Click ‘View’( ) on toolbar. Below is the image of searched result.

 In order to print preview page, click ‘Print’ on toolbar. Then the report prints out.

 In order to export preview page, click ‘Export’ on toolbar. Then the report is sent with desired file type.

475
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

476
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

17.4 Event Summary Report

17.4.1 Access Event Summary Report by Reader

It is a function that prints access event summary report by reader that satisfies search conditions based on access
granted events

 Screen Description

Search Condition

 Report Type

 Access Event Summary Report by Reader - It is a type of report that shows summary of access
events by reader.

 Access Event Summary Report by Reader(detailed) - It is a type of report that shows an access event

477
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

of Access Event Summary Report by reader in detail.

 Event Time : Select time that you want.

 Reader Name : Input when you search by reader name.

 When you input readers as a search condition, once you click the search button, reader list appears
as above figure

 and you can select readers that you want to input.

 Employee Name : Input when you search by employee name.

 When you input employee names as a search condition, once you click the search button, employee
list appears as above figure

 and you can select employees that you want to input.

 Sort type : Printing by desired order is possible and printing as it ordered is possible.

 Sort type is reader name.

 Sort order

 Select whether to use ascending or descending sort to apply sort type that you selected above.

 Function description.

Report preview and print.

 Select Access Event Summary Report by Reader or Access Event Summary Report by Reader (detailed)
from report type.

 Input event time of search condition.

 Click Reader Name Search button of search condition to input reader name.

 Click Card Holder Search button of search condition to search for employees.

478
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Select Sort Type from Sort Condition.

 Select Sort Order from Sort Condition.

 Click View( ) on toolbar. When there is result, it is displayed as figure below.

479
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 To print preview screen, click Print button of toolbar and the report is printed out from the printer.

 To export preview screen, click Export button of toolbar and the screen is exported to a file of type that
you want.

480
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

17.4.2 Access Event Summary Report by Card Holder

It is a function that prints access event summary report by card holder that satisfies search conditions based on
access granted events

 Screen Description

Search Condition

 Report Type

 Access Event Summary Report by Card Holder - It is a type of report that shows summary of access
events by card holder.

 Access Event Summary Report by Card Holder (Detailed) - It is a type of report that shows an access
event of Access Event Summary Report by card holder.

 Event Time : Select time that you want.

 Reader Name : Input when you search by reader name.

481
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 When you input readers as a search condition, once you click the search button, reader list appears
as above figure

 and you can select readers that you want to input.

 Employee Name : Input when you search by employee name.

 When you input employee names as a search condition, once you click the search button, employee
list appears as above figure

 and you can select employees that you want to input.

 Sort type : Printing by desired order is possible and printing as it ordered is possible.

 Sort type is employee name.

 Sort order

 Select whether to use ascending or descending sort to apply sort type that you selected above.

 Function description.

Report preview and print.

 Select Access Event Summary Report by Card Holder or Access Event Summary Report by Card Holder
(detailed) from report type.

 Input event time of search condition.

 Click Reader Name Search button of search condition to input reader name.

 Click Card Holder Search button of search condition to search for employees.

482
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Select Sort Type from Sort Condition.

 Select Sort Order from Sort Condition.

 Click View( ) on toolbar. When there is result, it is displayed as figure below.

483
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 To print preview screen, click Print button of toolbar and the report is printed out from the printer.

 To export preview screen, click Export button of toolbar and the screen is exported to a file of type that
you want.

484
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

17.5 Mustering Report

17.5.1 Mustering Report

Screen showing result of preview without any condition for mustering report in event of fire.

 Screen description

Search Condition

 Area Name: Select name of the area you wish to search.

 Name: Enter name of the employee you wish to search.

 Card Number: Enter card number you wish to search. (Only numbers between 3 and 10 digits are
possible.)

 Door: Select the door you want to search.

 Sort Type: Set up display order of data when printing out a report.

 Select within area name, employee number, card number, employee name, event time.

 Sort Order

 Choose whether above sort standard set-up will be displayed in ascending or descending order..

 Function description

Report preview and print

 Select the area name in search criteria.

 Enter the employee’s name in search criteria.

 Enter the card number in search criteria.

 Select the door in search criteria.

 Click report view( ) button at the top tool bar in the screen. If there is any result, it shows like below.

 (This report is designed to fit A4 size.)

485
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 In order to print preview page, click ‘Print’ on toolbar. Then the report prints out.

 In order to export preview page, click ‘Export’ on toolbar. Then the report is sent with desired file type.

486
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

17.6 Etc Report

17.6.1 Auditing Log Report

This function is to print out the auditing log report corresponding to the saved auditing log information.

 Screen Description

Search condition

 Event time: Select the range of time to be searched.

 Log on ID search

 In case Log on ID information is used as search condition. Click the button then image above
appears. User can select the User IDs from the list.

 Menu search

 In case menu information is used as search condition. Click the button then image above appears.
User can select the menu from the list.

Sort Type and Order: User can print out in desired order.

 Sort Type: Configure the order of data on report.

 Select between Log on ID and event time.

487
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Sort Order

 Select whether to arrange in ascending/descending order.

 Function Description

Report Preview and print out

 Select event time for search condition.

 Select Log on ID for the search condition.

 Insert menu name for the search condition.

 Select criteria for Sort Type and Order.

 Select Sort Order for Sort Type and Order.

 Click ‘View’( ) on toolbar. Below is the image of searched result.

 In order to print preview page, click ‘Print’ on toolbar. Then the report prints out.

 In order to export preview page, click ‘Export’ on toolbar. Then the report is sent with desired file type.

488
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

489
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

17.6.2 Notification Report

This function is to print out the e-mail/SMS notice report corresponding to the saved e-mail/SMS notice information.

 Screen Description

Search condition

 Notice time: Select the range of time to be searched.

 Notice type: Select the notice type to be searched.

 Event: Select event type to be searched.

 Search receiver

 In case receiver information is used as search condition. Click the button then image above appears.
User can select the receivers from the receiver list.

 Event time: Select the range of time to be searched.

Sort Type and Order: User can print out in desired order.

 Sort Type: Configure the order of data on report.

 Select between receiver name and event time.

 Sort Order

 Select whether to arrange in ascending/descending order.

 Function Description

Report Preview and print out

 Select notice time for the search condition.

 Select notice type for the search condition.

 Select event for the search condition.

 Insert receiver for the search condition.

 Insert event time for the search condition.

490
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Select criteria for Sort Type and Order.

 Select Sort Order for Sort Type and Order.

 Click ‘View’( ) on toolbar. Below is the image of searched result.

 In order to print preview page, click ‘Print’ on toolbar. Then the report prints out.

 In order to export preview page, click ‘Export’ on toolbar. Then the report is sent with desired file type.

491
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

17.6.3 User Defined Report

IDTECK Standardprogram may use the previously defined reports but in case there is no report needed, it can create
user defined report. This menu will explain the method to create log-in and out reports among the reports provided,
so that users can created reports as needed.

 Screen description

 Report design screen is using Active Reports’COM object of Data Synamics Company. Users may create,
print.

 out and Report Previews under the same user interface and circumstances as Microsoft users

Main tool bar

 File

 : Display new/empty report on the working window

 : Open Active Report file format(extension file name is .rpx) to working


window

 : Save currently activated report design file to Active Report file format

 : This is function to send report in other type of format. Currently ‘send


out’ formats that are supported are HTML(Hypertext Markup Language), PDF(Portable Document
Format), RTF(Rich Text Format), TXT(Plain Text), TIFF(Tagged Image Format) and XLS(Microsoft Excel
Worksheet)

 : End the user defined report.

 Edit

 : Can use when user want to cancel certain action

 : Redo function to have the cancelled action re-done

 : Temporarily save the selected object but delete it from the screen

 : Copy the selected object.

492
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 : Paste the copied or cut object.

 : Delete selected object

 : Select all the objects per respective section

Tool box of Active Reports

 ActiveReport3.0

 Label: Use to design on canvas the text objects that are not linked to data field.

 TextBox: Use to design on canvas the text objects that are linked with data field.

 CheckBox: Use to design on canvas the balloon type check-box objects that are linked with data
field

 RichTextBox: Use to design on canvas the RTF type of text. Can be useful to create mail merge type
of report

 Shape: Use to draw quadrangle, circle or ellipse on canvas

 Picture: Can inset image(wmf, bmp, jpg, gif) onto canvas

 Line: Can draw line on canvas. Click Ctrl key or Shift key together to draw straight line or parallel
line easily

 PageBreak: Use to split into new page within the section

 Barcode: Support 24 types of bar code in 1 dimension

 SubReport: This is object to insert sub report which can create report layouts that is impossible to
edit per layer or complicated formats

Attention

When subreport is inserted, Subreport Object = CreateSubreport(“report name”) method


needs to be called in the respected band OnFormat event within script editor

493
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 OleObject: Insert objects created in other program(picture, chart, worksheet) by using OLE(Object
Linking and Embedding) function in canvas

+ Select OleObject control icon in tool box.

+ Select area to insert control

+ Dialog window of the object to be inserted to canvas will be displayed

+ Select type of OLE object to insert and click OK button to close dialog window

 ChartControl: Insert chart on canvas. It can be easily done when using chart magic function

 ReportInfo: Use to mark relevant page and set up report date.

Canvas

 ReportHear: Report header

 Only one report header section can be set up to be shown on the first part of report

 This area is to design the contents that needs to be shown on the first part of the report i.e. report

494
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

title, summary and chart etc.

 ReportFooter: Report tail

 Only one report tail section can be set up to be shown on the last part of report

 This area is to design the contents that need to be printed out only once on the last part of the
report i.e. report summary, total sum etc.

 PageHeader: Page header

 Only one page section can be set up to be printed out on the upper side per page of the report

 When page does not include report header section, the page header section will be printed out on
the far upper hand

 Page header section is to design the contents that are to be printed out on the upper side of each
page and also column header, page number and page title.

 PageFooter: Page tail

 Only one page section can be set up to be printed out on the lower side per page of the report

 Page tail section is to design the contents that are to be printed out on the upper side of each page
and also page total and page number.

 GroupHeader/GroupFooter: Group header/group tail

 One or several reiterated group sections can be set up and each group sections will have their
exclusive headers and tail sections.

 Group header is inserted and printed out just before detailed section is printed out.

 Group tail is inserted and printed out just after detailed section is printed out

 Number of times each group section is being printed out depends on the binding data numbers by
groupings

 Detail: Detail

 Only one detail section can be set up per report

 Detail section plays role of the main body of the report and is processed according to the number
of individual record number of bound data sets in the report.

Canvas tab

 Designer: User can create design report as wanted

 Script: Event creating tab.

 Regardless type and contents of section, each section has 3 events - Format, BeforePrint and

495
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

AfterPrint.

 Format event

+ Format event is occurs after data is loaded and is bound to the controls that are included in
the section. However, it occurs before the loading of section is done on canvas

+ Format event is the only event that may change the height of the section.
Specifications/Characters of controls can be set up or changed in each section’s Format
event and also loading of sub reports can be done.

+ In case CanGrow or CanShrink specification/characters of section itself or certain controls


that are included insection are set as true, automatic grow or shrink of all the controls
included

+ in the section will be done. Therefore, height information of section or control may not be
gained in this event.

 BeforePrint event

+ BeforePrint BeforePrint event occurs before the loading of section is done on canvas

+ Size change of section itself and all the controls included in the section are completed
before this event occurs. Size of certain controls of the respective section can be re-adjusted
using this event

+ Since all controls and section size are set before this event occurs, users may obtain
accurate size information of section and controls using this event, and may also re-adjust
size of control as needed but may re-adjust the size of section itself.

 AfterPrint event

+ AfterPrint event occurs after the loading of section is done on canvas

+ User can use this event to re-color text which already has loading done on canvas. The z
location of the control that is drawn later(order of layer – the layer drawn later will be
positioned higher) will be highly positioned in ActiveReport Designer Studio

 Type of report design various much thus the sequence of occurrence of event needs to be dynamic
in order to be optimized to meet the different needs of reports

 Among the events explained above, the Format event is used most frequently, followed by
BeforePrint event. After event is used rarely.

Attention

Event processing will be done orderly only in case when Format event occurs after
BeforePrint event and before AfterPrint event. However, several events can occur before
BeforePrint and AfterPrint event in detailed section that include various records

496
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Preview: Tab to preReport Preview

Specification/character of control window

 Part to define the specification/character of control that is used in report. Basically, basic values are
defined but values can be dynamically changed via script window before report is printed out

 Description of function

User defined report

 Setting up data linking text row

 Click Edit Data Source in DataSource of Specification/character window.

 Click [Build] button and select “Microsoft OLE DB Provider for SQL Server” as linking provider. Click
[Next] button.

 Select server name that database is installed, log-in information and database(IDTECK_ENT) and
execute link text

497
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 If link text is successfully executed, link to database is successfully done. Click ‘OK’ button to check
link string

 Create query phrase to retrieve data and click [OK] button. Next SQL is query phrase to retrieve data
from Log-in/Log-out Log table

Example of query phrase

SELECT *

FROM AC_AUTH_LOGINOUT_LOG

WHERE LOGINID = '<%login ID%>'

ORDER BY LOGINID, EVENTTIME

 Click [Fields] – [Bound] to automatically display the fields linked to the database

 Creating script and design

498
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Drag and drop the fields that user want to print out onto the canvas

 Create script that are changed to wish-print out format by using Format event in script tab

Script example

public void Detail1_Format()

((TextBox)rpt.Sections["PageHeader1"].Controls["txtDate"]).Text = DateTime.Now.ToString();

// Print out after changing log-in mode to string

string strLoginType =((TextBox)rpt.Sections["Detail1"].Controls["txtLoginType"]).Text;

if(strLoginType == "1")

((TextBox)rpt.Sections["Detail1"].Controls["txtLoginType"]).Text = "ID + password" ;

else if(strLoginType == "2")

((TextBox)rpt.Sections["Detail1"].Controls["txtLoginType"]).Text = "ID + finger print" ;

else if(strLoginType == "3")

499
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

((TextBox)rpt.Sections["Detail1"].Controls["txtLoginType"]).Text = "ID+ Password + finger


print" ;

// Print out after changing log-in mode to string

string strInoutFG =((TextBox)rpt.Sections["Detail1"].Controls["txtInOutFG"]).Text;

if(strInoutFG == "S0")

((Label)rpt.Sections["Detail1"].Controls["lblInOutFG"]).Text = "Log-in successful" ;

else if(strInoutFG == "S1")

((Label)rpt.Sections["Detail1"].Controls["lblInOutFG"]).Text = " Log-out successful " ;

else if(strInoutFG == "F0")

((Label)rpt.Sections["Detail1"].Controls["lblInOutFG"]).Text = " Log-in failed " ;

else if(strInoutFG == "F1")

((Label)rpt.Sections["Detail1"].Controls["lblInOutFG"]).Text = " Log-out failed " ;

else

((Label)rpt.Sections["Detail1"].Controls["lblInOutFG"]).Text = " Log-in failed " ;

 Click [Preview] when design and event creation is completed. If parameter is needed, Insert in the
value on the blank and click [OK]

500
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Result where the parameter is applied will be displayed in the query phrase

 Saving user defined report

 Click [Designer] tab and click [Save] in [File] menu to save. [Save] is not activated in [Preview] and
[Script] tabs so saving is not possible.

 Sending out user defined report

 Click [Export] in [File] menu in [Preview] tab to have ‘sending out’ page displayed

501
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

 Report can be sent out in wanted format.

502
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

17.6.4 Login/outreport

From saved login/out information, this function prints the matching login/out report as searching condition.

 Screen description

Search Condition

 Event Time: Select time you wish to search.

 Event Type: Select event type you wish to search.

 Login ID

 If you search login ID from search condition, click the applicable button to appear login ID list as
above then available to select login ID you wish to check.

Arrangement condition : As you want, it can be arranged then printing can allow the arranged order.

 Arrangement Standard : it’s setting for order of data display when printing report.

 Select among login ID, event time and login name.

 Arrangement type

 Select descending or display to display the selected arrangement standard.

 Function description

503
Rev-20151022 IDTECK STANDARD

Report preview and print

 Select event time of search condition blank.

 Select login ID of search condition.

 Select event type of search condition.

 Select arrangement standard form arrangement condition.

 Select arrangement type of arrangement condition.

 Select the view ( ) button on top toolbar.If there is existing searched result then it displays as below.

 If you want to print preview screen, click the print button then the report is printed by printer.

 If you want send preview screen to other file, click the send button then it is sent as the format type
you want.

504

You might also like